Henry & Emily Bucher 
 
 Route # 1 
 
 Black Earth, Wise. 53515 
 
 j6t<^M^^- 
 
 -i% 
 
♦ 
 
^^ -^-^'-/^^ 
 
 
HEADS 
 
 MPONGWE GRAMMAR; 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 MOST OF THE PRINCIPLES NEEDED BY A LEARNER 
 
 BY A LATE 
 
 MISSIONARY. _Jji^^^ /^ V^ 
 /^alcpfm ^Szi/Auc^ (^SoM^ J^iftia^^gd^ ^ U^t^Iii^ €U^ua 
 
 GABOON, WEST AFRICA. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 MISSION HOUSE, 23 CENTRE STREET. 
 
 1879. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 FACE 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY 7 
 
 Elementary Sounds 9 
 
 Vowels 9 
 
 Diphthongs 9 
 
 Consonants 9 
 
 Orthography Phonetic 10 
 
 ETYMOLOGY 10 
 
 Gender and Denominatives 10 
 
 Number and Classification ; 10 
 
 First Class 10 
 
 Second and Third Classes 11 
 
 Fourth Class 11 
 
 Note. — iVj/, Sin., changed to m, etc 10 
 
 Nouns used only in Plural 12 
 
 Verbal Nouns 13 
 
 First Class > 12 
 
 Second Class 13 
 
 Third Class 13 
 
 Fourth Class 14 
 
 Nouns in Superlative Degree 14 
 
 Adjectives 14 
 
 Comparison of 14 
 
 Table of Adjectives and Nouns 14 
 
 Nouns used as Adjectives 15 
 
 Pronominal Adjectives 15 
 
 How Inflected 15 
 
 Fragments of Adjectives 16 
 
 Table of Compounded Adjectives 16 
 
 " Plurals Compounded 16 
 
 Location of Adjective Pronouns 16 
 
 Table of Classes 16 
 
 Terminal i, initial iyam 18 
 
 Table of Nouns and Adjective Pronouns 17 
 
 Emphatic Suffix, miemS 17 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 18 
 
 Used in Interrogations 18 
 
 Numeral Adjectives 19 
 
 (3) 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Decimal or Digital 19 
 
 Used as Nouns 19 
 
 Classed as Nouns 19 
 
 Table of Cardinal Numbers 19 
 
 Remarks.— Nouns 1st Class Singular 20 
 
 Arrangement of Nouns and Numerals 21 
 
 Abbreviation of Numerals 21 
 
 Numbers become Nouns, and N jun Numbered Possessive 21 
 
 Answer by sbow of Fingers 31 
 
 Adjective Plirases 21 
 
 Diminutive ye 21 
 
 Oedinals 22' 
 
 flow Formed 22 
 
 Fractional Parts 22 
 
 Pronouns 22 
 
 Personal — No Gender 22 
 
 Number aud Case 22 
 
 Table 23 
 
 Second Person Singiilar, m 23 
 
 Subject of iV^e, Objective 23 
 
 Relative Pronouns 23 
 
 0, Singular, wi, Plural 23 
 
 Agree with Antecedent in Number and Person 24 
 
 Interrogative Pronoun 24 
 
 How Used 24 
 
 Definite Pronoun . . 25 
 
 Very Indefinite 25 
 
 Table of Class and Number 25 
 
 Nominative Case changed to Objective . . .*. 25 
 
 Particles 26 
 
 Adverbs of Place 36 
 
 " Time 26 
 
 Verbs as Adverbs 26 
 
 Adverbs of Manner and Cause 37 
 
 Prepositions 27 
 
 Meaning from the Verb 38 
 
 Mr, ndd, and nde 28 
 
 Conjunctions 38 
 
 Copulative Conjunctions 28 
 
 Disjunctive " 38 
 
 Interjections 29 
 
 Verbs 29 
 
 Regular Verbs 29 
 
 Initial, Consonant, and Reciprocal 29 
 
 Root or Stem of Verb 29 
 
 Table of Change to Imperative ' 30 
 
 Conjugation of Verb 31 
 
 Formation of Passive Voice 31 
 
 I. — Radical Conjugation 31 
 
 II.— Causative " 31 
 
COXTEXTS. O 
 
 III. — Relative Conjugatiou 31 
 
 IV.— Frequenttit'e " 32 
 
 V.-Reflexive " 32 
 
 VI. — Reciprocal " 32 
 
 VII.— Indefinite " 32 
 
 Compound " 33 
 
 Table of Compound Conjugations S3 
 
 Augments Parts of the Verbs 34 
 
 Negative, Active, and Passive 34 
 
 " How Formed 34 
 
 " Verbs 34 
 
 Modes— Five 35 
 
 Indicative, the Radical 35 
 
 Imperative Formed 35 
 
 Subjunctive " 35 
 
 Signs of Subjunctive 35 
 
 Potential — Characteristics 36 
 
 Infinitive Sign of 36 
 
 Tense, Number, and Person 37 
 
 Imperative Plural — Number 37 
 
 Immediate Past Tense 37 
 
 Paulo Past " 37 
 
 Historical " 37 
 
 Perfect " 37 
 
 Pluperfect " 37 
 
 First and Second Future Tense 38 
 
 Another, Nle be Tense 38 
 
 Irregular Verbs 38 
 
 Substantive Verbs 39 
 
 " " Negative 39 
 
 Participles 40 
 
 PARADIGM OF REGULAR VERB 42 
 
 Indicative Mode 42 
 
 Imperative " 43 
 
 " " Negative 44 
 
 Subjunctive" 45 
 
 " " Causative Conjugation 45 
 
 Potential " Radical " 47 
 
 Infinitive " 47 
 
 Participle 48 
 
 LIST OF ADVERBS 48 
 
 SYNTAX— Nouns 52 
 
 Nouns and Adjectives 53 
 
 Verbs 53 
 
 Place of Nominative Case 53 
 
 Verbs and Verbs 53 
 
 Passive Voice 54 
 
 SALUTATIONS 54 
 
 ADIEUS 55 
 
 Mboio, Adjective Verbalized 55 
 
6 CONTENTS. 
 
 ELISION AND CHANGE OE VOWELS 56 
 
 In Verbs 56 
 
 In Nouns 56 
 
 In Pronominal Adjectives 57 
 
 EWIRIA— Dakk Sayings 5t 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS 58 
 
 Language — How Cultured 58 
 
 " How Preserved 59 
 
 Proverbs 59 
 
HEADS OF THE MPONGWE GRAMMAE. 
 
 The Mpongwe is a dialect of one (tlie Southern) of the two 
 great families of language spoken over the greater part of the 
 continent of Africa. Commencing at the Cameroons Moun- 
 tain and River at the north-east corner of the Gulf of Guinea, 
 this language extends across the continent to the Mombas 
 country on the east, and is spoken over a great part of Africa 
 South. There is five times as much difference between the 
 Dualla language, spoken in Cameruns, and the Efik, spoken 
 in Old Calabar, fifty miles west, as there is between the Dualla 
 and the Zulu-Kafir, spoken in South-eastern Africa, near 
 three thousand miles away. 
 
 The Mpongwe, o r Ayogo { wise ones, as they modestly call 
 themselves), live on both sides of the Gabun River, about a 
 haK degree north latitude, extending fifty or sixty miles inte- 
 rior. The Orungu, about sixty miles south, and the Nkarai 
 people from eighty to one hundred miles beyond, speak the 
 same language, with a few differing words, and a slight dif- 
 ference of pronunciation. 
 
 In the present limited extent to which these languages, or 
 dialects, are known and written, it would be useless to attempt 
 to trace their relations and analogies ; and we, of the present 
 day, can only contribute our mite for the use of the ones who 
 shall follow us in the coming century. And they will revel 
 in the beauties of a language or dialects as elaborate in 
 structure and as musical in tone as any of the old unspoken 
 (not dead) languages that are the delight of the scholars of the 
 present day. And it is only forty years since any of these di- 
 alects (with, perhaps, one or two exceptions) had a sentence 
 written, or even an alphabet. 
 
 An outline grammar of the Mpongwe language was printed 
 in 1847", written by Rev. J. Leighton Wilson, modestly cred- 
 
 (7) 
 
8 HEADS OF THE liIPONaWE GRAilMAK. 
 
 ited to the "Missionaries of the A. B. C. F. M., Gaboon Mis- 
 sion, W. A." This was written about four years after the 
 missionaries first went to Gabun, and gives the general prin- 
 ciples of the language with marvelous accuracy, after so short 
 a study. 
 
 The present work was commenced at the request of a gen- 
 tleman, long residing on the coast, as the mere outline of the 
 grammar, to be printed in a book which he was writing. The 
 book has not been published, and the work has grown to its 
 present dimensions, and is printed for the use of the American 
 missionaries and others at Gabun and vicinity. 
 
 After an absence of more than seven years, with no possi- 
 bility of consulting a native Mpongw^e, it is with many mis- 
 givings that some of the modes and tenses (more especially 
 the negative forms) are put forth ; and it is with little hope 
 of perfect accuracy that it is now allowed to be printed. 
 
OETHOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. All the sounds in this language can be expressed bj the 
 Eoman alphabet with a little moditication. The language has 
 been -written phonetically, and the letters are used as follows : 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 2. <i^ as a in far, tar ; ^ as a in fall, tall. 
 
 6 as e in they, prey ; c as e in met, pet. 
 i as i in machine, ravine. 
 as o in note, mote ; o as o in not, pot. 
 u as 00 in moon, soon. 
 
 3. Diphthongs ai^ as in Krais ; ao^ as in osaon, a thing or af- 
 fair ; iu as in mpiu, hot or heat ; ie as Angamhic, God ; rribiarn- 
 bie, well. And these may all be resolved into their original 
 elements by prolonging a little the sound of each letter. 
 
 CONSONANTS USED AKE I 
 
 4. b, d, f, g (always hard), j, k, 1, m, n, p, r, s, t, v, w, y, z, 
 e, h, q, and X are not used. There are also combinations of 
 consonant sounds, as mh, mhoni, goat; mhoa, a dog; mbw, 
 mhwedi, a captive ; omhwiri, fitish ; ihp, as mpolo, large ; 
 mpunji, ivoiy ; mw, as mwera, scratch. There is also an obscure 
 combination of m and w, as in omwa/ri, written and spoken 
 omdri, where m and w are resolved into m .• nd, as in ndego, 
 friend ; ng, as in tigoa, hog, ngdwe, captain ; nj, as in njicke, 
 trouble, njinla, gorilla : nk, as in nkomhe, sun : nt, as ntzngo^ 
 stick : nty^ as ntyozyo, foot, ntyigo, chirapasee, ny, as nydnli, 
 bird ; nyowe, bee : ngw, as ngwe, mother; vw, velia, imp. of 
 fweliar, sy, in syeva, to play, imp. syeva, play thou ; y, as yando, 
 congregation ; ayxianla, child, oywanga, iron ; y has the same 
 feound as ng in singer. 
 
 \* (9) 
 
10 MPONGWE GRAMMAR. 
 
 The combinations, contractions, and coalescences, for the 
 sake of euphony, are almost endless. 
 
 OKTHOGRAPHT. 
 
 5. The orthog]-aphy as used in writing this language is en- 
 tirely phonetic. No vowel has two sounds, and no two vow- 
 els are used to represent the same sound, as haj and they in En- 
 glish. With the exception of the adjective pronouns, and less 
 than a half dozen nouns, no word in the language terminates with 
 a consonant. Or, in other words, with the exceptions named, 
 every word and every syllable terminates with a vowel sound. 
 There has been no attempt made to represent every shade of 
 sound in the language, for this would cumber the alphabet. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 6. There are eight parts of speech in the Mpongwe lan- 
 guage, the same as in English : noun, pronoun, adjective, 
 verb, adverb, preposition, conjunction, and interjection. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Y. l!Touns have number and classification, but no case end- 
 ing or gender. 
 
 Case is known as it is in English. 
 
 Gender is expressed by suffixing the word man or woman, 
 as o^wdnlome, child-man, or boy ; 0)j-wanto, child-woman, or 
 girl ; nyare-nyanto, cow ; nyare-nome, bull : the denomina- 
 tives calf, lamb, kid by prefixing the word child to the noun ; 
 a,s or^wd-nyare, child of a cow ; oyw-iddmbe, child of a sheep ; 
 oywd-mhoni^ child of a goat. 
 
 NUMBER AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 8. The Mpongwe nouns may be arranged in four classes, 
 distinguished by the manner of forming the plural of each. 
 
 Number is expressed on the initial syllable of the noun. 
 
 First Class. 
 
 9. This class embraces all those nouns which commence 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 11 
 
 with a consonant sound (written with one or more consonants) 
 and form their plurals by prefixing i or si to the singular. 
 
 Goat, 
 
 House, 
 
 Gorilla, 
 
 mhoni^ irriboni or sinibofii- 
 
 nago, inago or sinago. 
 
 njinla, injinla or sinjinla. 
 
 Second Class. ■ 
 
 10. This class embraces all those nouns having e for their 
 initial syllable, and forms the plurals by dropping this letter ; 
 thus; 
 
 SINGirLAK. PLUEAIi. 
 
 Head, ewonjo, wonjo. 
 
 Boat, elende, lende. 
 
 Chest, egara, gara. 
 
 Note . — If the first consonant of the word be z, in forming the 
 plural e is dropped, and the 2 is changed to y ; thus : 
 
 Book, 
 
 Thing, 
 Broom, 
 
 SINGULAB. 
 
 ezango, 
 ezdma, 
 ezdrribdld, 
 
 Third Glass. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 yango. 
 ydma. 
 ydnibdld. 
 
 11. This class embraces all those nonns which have o for 
 their initial letter ; and they form their plurals, first, by chang- 
 ing into i ; second, by changing o into a / third, by chang- 
 ing into si. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1. River. oldvi, ildvi. 
 Basket, otondo, Hondo. 
 
 2. Arm, ogd. agd. 
 Canoe, owaro, ama/ro. 
 
 3. Feather, owowa, sihowa. 
 Shoulder, ovega^ silega. 
 
 Song, oweinbo, ijerribo or sijemho. 
 
 Leaf, owavi, ijavi or sijavi. 
 
 Hair, orue. itue or situe. 
 
12 MPONGWE GKAMMAE, 
 
 Note 1. — ^To this class belongs a large number of nouns used 
 only in the singular; asombu, ashes; ompimga, wind; oyioei^ breath. 
 
 Note 2. — -Abstract verbal nouns also belong to the plural of the 
 third division of this class. They take the initial letters si or i, 
 usually the latter, as pakiHa, to begin; ipakilia, the begining; 
 benda, to hate; ibeiida, hatred; tonda, to love; itunda, love, si in 
 these verbal nouns is used for emphasis ; as ejdgd, he is sick ; are 
 nla sijdgd, he is very sick. 
 
 Fourth Class. 
 12. This class embraces all nouns having i for their initial 
 in the singular, and forming their plurals by changing i into 
 a, thus: 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Sheep, iddmbe, admnhe. 
 
 Stone, ido, ado. 
 
 Banana, itdta, atdtd. 
 
 Note 1. — If the first two consonants in the singular be ny, the 
 ny is changed to m ; if the first consonant be v, the v is changed 
 in the plural to mp ; if it be w, the w is changed to mb. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Post, 
 
 inyengd, 
 
 atnengd. 
 
 Poison, 
 
 inyemba, 
 
 ameniba. 
 
 Law, 
 
 ivanga. 
 
 ampa/nga. 
 
 Wing, 
 
 ivava., 
 
 ampava. 
 
 Jaw, 
 
 iwugu, 
 
 ambugu. 
 
 Breast, 
 
 ivenle, 
 
 amhenle. 
 
 Note 2.— To this belong many nouns used only in the plural, usu- 
 
 ally the names of liquids, thus : anlingo, 
 
 water; a/w^w, rum; agali, 
 
 oil; aka, sap; ampuni, 
 
 foam; amenje, peace. 
 
 VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 13. Verbal nouns belong to all the four classes of noun a 
 above, and are arranged according to the order of those 
 classes, to which also they are to be refered. 
 
 Class First. 
 Yerbals of this class are usually formed by prefixing n to 
 tlie ground form of the verb; thus, ntango, number, from 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 13 
 
 tanga, to count, nharabinli, manner of speaking, from Icamha, 
 to speak. When the verb has h or p for the mitial consonant, 
 it forms this class of nouns by prefixing m to the ground form 
 of the verb. Euphonic concord will be noted here, h and j» 
 are labials, and tlie prefix must be the same, inbohinli, man- 
 ner of barking, from hoha, to bark ;_ mhoginli, manner of 
 shouting, from loginla, to make a disturbance ; mjpandinlo, 
 ladder, from panda^ to ascend. 
 
 Others are formed from the imperative of the verb, nyiiili- 
 nlo, a dream, from yiMinlo, dream thou ; nyenibi, a song, from 
 yemba, sing thou. 
 
 Note. — There is no rule apparent for using the ground form in 
 one verb, and the imperative in another, as above and below. 
 
 Second Class. 
 
 14. Nonns of this class are formed by prefixing e to the 
 ground form of the verb, thus : 
 
 Ekamhia, interpreter, fi'om hamba, to speak. 
 
 Edingo^ crying, from diriga, to cry, mourn. 
 
 Eboli, fist, from hola, to strike. 
 
 Or, from the imperative, thus : 
 
 Egenliso, a measure, from genliza, measure thou. 
 
 Eromi, a messenger, from roma, send thou. 
 
 Eyenlo, mirror, from yenla, see thou. 
 
 Third Class. 
 
 15. This class is formed by prefixing o to the imperative of 
 the verb ; the terminal vowel, like the other classes, is changed 
 variously, but sometimes not at all. 
 
 Ogenda, a stranger, from genda, travel thou. 
 Ogomba, a fence, from gomba, enclose thou. 
 Oyi7ilo, a dance, from yinla, dance thou. 
 Ozyiwo, punishment, from zyiioa, punish, or whip. 
 
 Some from the ground form of the verb, thus : 
 OTcugi, pauper, from Tciiga, to become poor. 
 Oteihu, simpleton, from tema, to act foolishly. 
 
14 MPONGWE OEAMMAE. 
 
 For abstract nouns see note under the third division of 
 the third class of nouns. They belong to the plural of this 
 class of verbal nouns. 
 
 Fourth Class. 
 
 16. Nouns of this class are formed by prefixing * to the 
 imperative of the verb, and forming the plural after the fourth 
 class of nouns. 
 
 Igamba, a word, from gamha, speak. 
 Ivenda, greatness, from venda, become great. 
 Inyomanlo, contention, from yomanla^ contend. 
 
 There are also nouns in the superlative degree, formed by 
 reduplicating the noun, expressing the highest degree of 
 greatness or excellence. 
 
 Anloinenloihie, anloine, men, chief est men. 
 A7itoantwe, anto, women, chief est women. 
 Igooiligonloe, igonlo, on high, most high. 
 Ongulunguhime, ngiilh\ strength, Almighty. 
 Orundoru7idiej orunda, sacred, Most Holy. 
 
 Each of the foregoing may be used in the singular or plural. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 17. The Mpongwe language is poor in adjectives, and the 
 few in use have no regular degrees of comparison. There is 
 a form of comparison, not much used, and perhaps not author- 
 ized fully. Mhia., good ; mhia Icwe, better ; mbia me, best. 
 Comparison is often expressed by the use of words, and even 
 phrases and circumlocutions. Viaganlu, from piaganla, 
 to surpass, to excel, is much used. Posyo^ more than. Em- 
 phasis is also used to express comparison, but is necessarily 
 very indefinite. 
 
 18. Adjectives of themselves have neither class or numbers, 
 but receive these from the nouns with which they arc used. 
 
 1st Class, Sin. — nago Tnhia, house good. 
 " ^'/ 1 Plu. — sinago simhia, houses good. 
 
ORTHOGBAPHY. 15 
 
 2d Class, Sin. — erer'' evia, tree good. 
 
 " " Flu. — rere via, trees " 
 
 3d " Sin. — ogulu omhia, rope good. 
 
 " " Pin. — ingulu imhia, ropes " 
 
 " " 2d Sin. — ogd ombia^ arm " 
 
 " " " Plu. — agd amhia, arms " 
 
 " " 3d Sin. — owavi otnbiay leaf good. 
 
 " " " F\u.—Sij(wisihia, " " 
 
 4tli " Sin. — igamb' ivia, word good. 
 
 " " Plu. — agamh' ambia, words good. 
 
 19. There is a class of nouns which are used as adjectives 
 by taking the vinculum of the definite pronoun to conform 
 them to the number and class of the nouns which they follow 
 and qualify. 
 
 1st Class, Sin. — JVago yapiipu, house of whiteness. 
 
 " " Plu. — sinago sajpupu, houses of whiteness. 
 
 2d " Sin. — elende zatenlatenla, boat of redness. 
 
 " " Plu. — lende yatenlatenla, boats of redness. 
 
 3d " Sin. — ogclli loi-ngulu, twine of strength. 
 
 " " Plu. — igdli yi-ngulu, twines of strength. 
 
 4th " Sin. — ilasa ny-onligi, orange of sweetness. 
 
 " " Plu. — alasa m-onligi, oranges of sweetness. 
 
 " " Sin. — itdtd nyantimtu, the whole banana. 
 
 " " Plu. — apaki mavidvid, caps of blackness. 
 
 " " " Aha mi-nonli, sap of bitterness. 
 
 " " " Anlmgo, mi Tnjyiu, water of heat. 
 
 The above table does not pretend to exhaust the list of sub- 
 stantive adjectives, neither does it appear why the definite 
 pronoun unites so differently with different woi'ds. 
 
 PEONOMIlSrAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 20. These are inflected in nearly the same manner as the 
 preceding. The roots or stems of these adjective pronouns 
 are as follows : 
 
 Sin. — am my, d your, e his. 
 
 Plu. — azyo ours, ani yours, ao theirs. 
 
16 
 
 MPONGWE GKAMMAE. 
 
 The fragments of definite pronouns with which these are 
 compounded for nse, and which inflect them to agree with the 
 different classes of nouns, are as follows : 
 
 1st Class, Sin. — y. Flu. — s or si. 
 2d " " z. " y. 
 
 3d " " w. 
 dth " " ny 
 
 m. 
 
 The adjective pronouns compounded are as follows : 
 
 1st Class . 
 
 
 
 Sin. 
 Flu. 
 
 ydw, ray 
 sajn " 
 
 ?/« yom 
 
 ye his. 
 
 2d " . 
 
 
 
 Sin. 
 
 za7n " 
 
 s^ " 
 
 ze " 
 
 3d " '. 
 
 
 
 Flu. 
 
 Sin. 
 
 yam " 
 ^oaon " 
 
 2/a " 
 
 
 a a 
 
 4th " ! 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 Fin. 
 Sin. 
 Flu. 
 
 yam " 
 nyam " 
 
 ijd ^ " 
 m4 " 
 
 Wy(3 " 
 
 mc " 
 
 PLURAL FOKM OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Ist Class . 
 
 
 
 Sin. 
 Flu. 
 
 yazyo our. yatili your. ^ 
 sazyo " sanli " 
 
 yao their. 
 
 2d " 
 
 
 
 Sin. 
 
 zazyo " 
 
 sa?^?^ " 
 
 zao " 
 
 3d " 
 
 
 - • • 
 
 Flu. 
 Sin. 
 
 yazyo " 
 icazyo " 
 
 yanli " 
 wanli " 
 
 
 it a 
 4t]i " 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 Flu. 
 Sin. 
 Flu. 
 
 yazyo " 
 nyazyo " 
 riiazyo " 
 
 nyanli " 
 manli " 
 
 ijao " 
 nyao " 
 mao " 
 
 21. The adjective or adjective pronoun usually stands next 
 after the noun which it qualifies. The following table will 
 better show the relation of adjective pronoun^ to the nouns 
 which they qualify, than any descrijDtion : 
 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 MY. 
 
 THY. 
 
 HIS. 
 
 1st Class .... 
 
 Town 
 
 Sin. 
 
 nhali 
 
 yam 
 
 yd 
 
 ye 
 
 u u 
 
 a 
 
 Flu. 
 
 inJ^ali 
 
 sam 
 
 sa 
 
 S6 
 
 2d " .... 
 
 Chest 
 
 Sin. 
 
 cqar^ 
 
 zam, 
 
 za 
 
 ze 
 
 u u 
 
 a . 
 
 Plu. 
 
 gari 
 
 yam 
 
 ^y^L- 
 
 ye 
 
OETHOGEAPHY. 
 
 17 
 
 
 NOTTNS. 
 
 MT. 
 
 Tar. 
 
 HIS. 
 
 3d Class .... 
 
 Yine 
 
 Sin. 
 
 ogdli 
 
 loam 
 
 wd 
 
 WO 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 Flu. 
 
 igdli 
 
 yam 
 
 ya 
 
 ye 
 
 u ii 
 
 
 
 x\rm, 2d 
 
 Sin, 
 
 ogd 
 
 warn 
 
 wa 
 
 we 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 ii ii 
 
 Pin. 
 
 agd 
 
 mam 
 
 ma 
 
 me 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 Leaf 3d 
 
 Sin. 
 
 oioavi 
 
 warn 
 
 wa 
 
 we 
 
 a u 
 
 
 
 ii . ii 
 
 Plu. 
 
 sijavi 
 
 sam, 
 
 sa 
 
 so 
 
 4th " 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 Sin. 
 
 i'gi 
 
 nyawj 
 
 nya 
 
 nye 
 
 U ii 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Plu. 
 
 agi 
 
 mam. 
 
 md 
 
 me 
 
 Note. — ^Most of the nouns in this table end properly in a, and 
 after the common manner of writing the a is changed to i. (But 
 the probability is that the terminal a should be elided, and i pre- 
 fixed to the adjective pronoun, as: iyam., iyd, iye. "T, , . . t >v«rt. tji ^., 
 
 22. Table of plural form of adjective pronouns, as used with 
 the nouns which they qualify : 
 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 OUR. 
 
 YOUR. 
 
 THEIB. 
 
 1st Class. 
 
 Town 
 
 Sin. 
 
 nhali 
 
 yazyo 
 
 yanli 
 
 yao 
 
 u 
 
 
 ii 
 
 Plu. 
 
 inhaH 
 
 sa~yo 
 
 mnli 
 
 sao 
 
 2d 
 
 
 Chest 
 
 Sin. 
 
 egari 
 
 zazyo 
 
 zaftl'h 
 
 zao 
 
 u 
 
 
 ii 
 
 Plu. 
 
 gari 
 
 yazyo 
 
 yanli 
 
 yao 
 
 3d 
 
 
 Twine 
 
 Sin. 
 
 ogdli 
 
 inmyo 
 
 waoili 
 
 wao 
 
 ii 
 
 
 Vine 
 
 Plu. 
 
 igdli 
 
 yazyo 
 
 yanli 
 
 yao 
 
 ii 
 
 " 2d. 
 
 Ann 
 
 Sin. 
 
 ogd 
 
 wazyo . 
 
 wanli 
 
 wao 
 
 ii 
 
 (( a 
 
 ii 
 
 Pi-:. 
 
 aga ■ 
 
 masyo 
 
 manJi 
 
 mao 
 
 a 
 
 " 3d. 
 
 Biscuit 
 
 Sin. 
 
 o'eqi 
 
 icazyo 
 
 wanli ■ 
 
 wao 
 
 ii 
 
 ii ii 
 
 ii 
 
 Plu. 
 
 ndeqi 
 
 sazyo 
 
 sanli 
 
 sao 
 
 4th 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 Sin. 
 
 Ujh , 
 
 nyazyo 
 
 ny lal'i 
 
 nyao 
 
 
 
 
 Plu. 
 
 agi 
 
 ni.a.zyo 
 
 mxinli 
 
 mao 
 
 a 
 
 
 Branches 
 
 Plu. 
 
 'impare 
 
 mnzyo 
 
 manli 
 
 mao 
 
 Ther.e 
 
 :i is an emphatic suffix to the pronoun and ihe adjec- 
 tive pronoun alike ; me^ mieme, myself ; awsme, yourself ; 
 ayeme, himself; azurocme, ourselves; 'arolueme, yourselves; 
 
 mi% inemseives. The same suffix is to the adjective pro- 
 is, thus, yamime^ my own ; samiTne, plu., my own. All 
 the persons the sam3. 
 
 waome, themselves 
 noun 
 
18 
 
 MPONGWE GRAMMAR. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 23. These are of two classes, yinld, this ; and yanla^ or 
 meydnld, that. 
 
 The following table will show the classification to be the 
 same as the adjective pronoun : 
 
 1st Class 
 2d " 
 8d " 
 4th " 
 
 Foot Sin. ntyozyo yinla 
 Basket " otondo \winld 
 Chest " egai^a \zinld 
 Eye " intyd nyinla 
 
 sinld 
 yinld 
 yinld 
 rainld 
 
 Ist Class 
 2d " 
 3d " 
 4th " 
 
 Hammer 
 Head 
 Fruit 
 Oranofe 
 
 '^mMityolo 
 ^eioo7ijo 
 olonda 
 ilasa 
 
 meydnld 
 mezdnld 
 mhvdnld 
 menydnld 
 
 m£sdnld 
 jYieydnld 
 meydnld 
 mhndnld 
 
 These definite or demonstrative adjective pronouns are 
 more frequently used in an interrogative sentence, thus : 
 
 Njali 
 
 Gun 
 
 yinld 
 
 this 
 
 yamande ? 
 
 whose ? 
 
 lyd. 
 
 yours. 
 
 Eere 
 
 Trees 
 
 yinld 
 
 these 
 
 yamande t 
 
 whose ? 
 
 iyam. 
 
 mine. 
 
 Aha minld im,d ; 
 
 Mangoes those yours 
 
 ndo 
 
 but 
 
 7nemdnld. irne. 
 
 those his. 
 
 Oumtanga 
 
 Ship 
 
 mewdnld 
 
 that 
 
 we? 
 
 what? 
 
 loi 
 of 
 
 JSfgesh. 
 
 English. 
 
 Elcnde 
 
 Bout 
 
 mcsdnld 
 
 that 
 
 zef 
 what? 
 
 zi 
 of 
 
 Mpongwe. 
 
 Mpongwe. 
 
 Ndaga 
 
 Affiiir 
 
 nde 
 what 
 
 yinld f 
 
 this? 
 
 
 AzUfiOpa mia. 
 
 We do not know. 
 
 Elendinta 
 
 Bow 
 
 nde mezdnld ? 
 
 what kind. that? 
 
 zi 
 of 
 
 Bafan. 
 
 Pa2;wes. 
 
 Esa 
 
 Thing 
 
 nde mezdnld ? 
 
 what that? 
 
 Igdiiga nyWkeli. 
 
 a spear of a Bakele. 
 
 VW 
 
OBTHOGKAPHT. 
 
 19 
 
 In the first two of the above sentences, mande f is the in- 
 terrogative word. In the fifth, we f ; in the sixth, ze f ; and 
 in the last three, nde ? 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 24. The manner of counting is decimal or digital (counting 
 always with their fingers) to ten, and then reduplicating. 
 They have no abbreviated words like twenty, thirty, forty, 
 but number the tens thus : two tens, three tens, four tens. 
 The numerals are sometimes used as nouns, and the first five 
 are in the first class of nouns. The last five are more fre- 
 quently used as nouns, thus : Orowa winld, this six ; ordr 
 genlo mewdnla^ that seven. Six and seven are of the third 
 class. Enenlai zinld^ this eight ; enldgomi mhdnld, that 
 nine. And eight and nine are of the second class. Ten 
 igomi, plu. agomi, is of the fourth class, forming its plural in 
 the same manner, and taking numerals after the same form. 
 Nhama^ one hundred, is in the 1st class of nouns, and takes 
 numerals as other nouns of that class; nlcama rribanli, two 
 hiuidred ; nlcama ntyaro, three hundred. For thousand they 
 have no word, but have talisn the English , calling it ntausen, 
 when speaking their own language. This word also belongs 
 to the first class of nouns. 
 
 '1st class. 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 2d class. 3d class. 4th class. 
 
 1. mclri Effyi^i Ofn^i 
 
 2. onbanli vanli imbanli- 
 
 3. ntyaro rarp iraro 
 
 4. n^ai r^ai inlai 
 
 5. ntyanli tanli itanli 
 
 6. orowa, indeclinable, invariable. 
 T. ordgenlo, " " 
 
 8. enei^ai, " " 
 
 9. enldgomi, " " 
 
 10. igomi, plu. agomi. 
 
 11. igoyni nVirndri, ten and one. 
 
 12. igomi nli vahli, ten and two. 
 
 ambanli. 
 araro. 
 anlai, 
 atanli. 
 
 c^ 
 
20 
 
 MPONGWE GRAJVIMAR 
 
 IST CLASS. 
 
 2l> CLASS. 
 
 3d class. 4th class. 
 
 13. igomi 
 
 
 nViranro. 
 
 14. igomi 
 
 
 nVanlai. 
 
 15. igomi 
 
 
 nVatanli. 
 
 16. igomi 
 
 
 nVorowa. 
 
 11. igomi 
 
 
 nVordgenlo. 
 
 18. igomi 
 
 nlmenlai. 
 
 
 19. igom^i 
 
 nVenlagom. 
 
 
 20. agomi 
 
 
 amhanli. 
 
 21. agomi 
 
 ambanli^ nl 
 
 ^imdri. 
 
 22. agomi 
 
 amhanli 
 
 nVambanli. 
 
 30. agomi 
 
 araro. 
 
 
 31. agomi 
 
 araro. nVimdri, tens, three and one. 
 
 40. agomi 
 
 anlai, tens, 
 
 four. 
 
 44. agomi 
 
 «;iZ(aj^ 
 
 *iZ^ wa^'. 
 
 50. agomi 
 
 
 atanli. 
 
 60. agomi 
 
 
 orowa. 
 
 70. agomi 
 
 
 ordgenlo. 
 
 80. agomi 
 
 m?m?a^. 
 
 
 90. agomi 
 
 enldgomi. 
 
 
 100. Nhamia, 
 
 1st Class. - M 
 
 .^ojra<!i.^ .a-i^ K'U.;<i t^ 5^< 
 
 110. JVkama 
 
 nV igomi. 
 
 
 112. JVkama 
 
 nVigomi 
 
 nlivanli. 
 
 120. nkama 
 
 nVagomi 
 
 amhanli. 
 
 1000. ntausen, 
 
 1st Class. 
 
 
 n fAics-fvc 
 
 . :^ -^CVO' 
 
 
 
 EEMARKS. 
 
 26. Kouns of the First Class, when followed by a numeral, 
 are used only in the singular number, thus : 7i(?^^ ntya/)'o, 
 house three ; nyilu ntyanli^ anchor live. To nine the nu- 
 meral stands next after the noun which it numbers. Yango 
 vanli^ books two; aTcdndd enenlai, plantains eight; igomi 
 (ten) with its plural agomi^ uniformly precedes the noun 
 which it numbers, thus : igomi nyimhonli, ten of goats ; 
 agom^i rrCaddmhe amhanli^ tens of sheep two. 
 
 Nyi., a form of the definite pronoun, uniformly comes be- 
 tween igomi and the noun following, dropping its vowel when 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 21 
 
 the following noun begins with a vowel, thus : igomi nya- 
 ddmle, ten of sheep. 
 
 The plural of ten, agomi, brings the vinculum in the same 
 manner, thus : 
 
 agomi ■manlag'^ anlai nVanlag'' atanli. 
 
 tens of people four and people five. 
 
 Abbreviated thus : agomi anlai nVanlag'' atanli. 
 
 tens four and people five. 
 
 So as they ascend in numbering, they condense ; 
 
 ICO 3 lO's ^ 6 
 
 nkaina s'anlaga ntyaro nV agomi ni'anl'Xg^ orowa nVanlaga 
 
 8 
 
 enlenlai. Abbreviated thus : 
 
 nltam.a ntyaro nl"* agomi orowa nVanlaga enlenlai. 
 
 hundred tbree and tons six and people eight. 
 
 They frequently abbreviate in this manner : inyare ata,nli., 
 cattle fives, tens being understood ; because inyare and atanli 
 can not be construed together; but agomi., tens, does agree 
 with atanli, and the mind instantly takes it thus : agomi 
 rrCinyare atanli.^ tens of cattle five. In these cases the hun- 
 dreds and tens become nouns, and the noun numbered takes 
 the definite pronoun and comes into the possessive c.ise ; un- 
 less you call the articulation a prepositipn, and then the noun 
 is in the objective case. 
 
 Again, a person asks, al'dndd memdnld mi re ntango se? 
 Plantains those are what number ? The person interrogated 
 holds up, say, eight fingers, and replies, mo minld, they are 
 these. The first person answers, enlenlai, eight. 
 
 The want of adjectives in this Janguage is supplied by 
 phrases, thus : are juwa pa, he is he died, or he is dead : e 
 jdgd yanla, he hears hunger: ejenV esyove, he sees thirst. 
 The few adjectives are used with much latitude of 'meaning. 
 Participles are considered in their own place. Ye is prefixed 
 to some nouns to express a few, thus : ye ydma, a few things ; 
 ye nyare, a few cattle ; y'addmhe, few sheep. • And this may 
 be a<-contraction from the following, or the following may be 
 a compound from it ; sinago sinyewd, a few houses ; gara 
 
22 
 
 MPONGWE GRAMMAR. 
 
 yewd, a few chests ; inlaTnlJ' imiewd, few cloths ; addnibc 
 am<ewd, a few sheep. 
 
 ORDINALS. 
 
 27. These are formed by prefixing the definite pronoun to 
 the number, or inserting it between the noun and the numeral ; 
 thus, nago y-imhanli, house of two, or second house ; egara 
 zi raro, chest of three, or third chest ; ofnenlo wHnlai, fourth 
 finger ; iddmhe ny'enlenlai, eighth sheep ; ilasa ny'^atanli^ 
 fifth orange. 
 
 There is no word for half except erenli, a cutting, from 
 tenia, to cut ; erenl ' evolo, a large cutting, more than half ; 
 erenV ezango, small cutting, less than half ; otenle is also 
 used. Anlingo mi re se go Tculu f how is the water in 
 the pail ? 3£i r otenle, it is half. Eyare is another word 
 meaning a splitting, jarua, to split, and used the same as 
 erenli. Mhei, a piece, is used nearly in the same way. And 
 these are all nouns. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 28. The Mpongwe language is rich in pronouns, and, tak- 
 ing various fonns according to the four declensions of nouns 
 (singular and plural) for which they stand instead, they can 
 be used with a definiteness found in few lansruao^es which are 
 not cognate, and constructed in nearly the same manner. 
 Thei-e are three kinds of pronouns — Personal, Relative and 
 Definite. 
 
 PERSONAIi PRONOUNS. 
 
 29. These have no gender, but have person, number and 
 case. The following table will exhibit most of the forms of 
 personal pronouns : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Pltteai.. 
 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 Object. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Object. 
 
 1st Person . . 
 2d "... 
 
 3d "... 
 
 mi 
 
 0, om, awe 
 
 e, aye 
 
 mie 
 d 
 
 ye, e 
 
 azue 
 
 anlue 
 
 wi 
 
 asue 
 anlue 
 wao 
 
OKTHOGEAPHY. 23 
 
 For the emphatic suffix to these, see under adjective pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 Note 1. — The first and second persons plural are the same in 
 the nominative and objective eases. The probability is that in 
 the third person singular e is the root of the objective case. And 
 no pronoun ending with e is ever used as the direct subject of a 
 verb, unless standing next after it, and usually incorporated 
 with it. 
 
 Note 2. — The m in the second person singular is used only to 
 make a euphonic concord when o would come next to a in the 
 verb, and thus avoid the coalescence of the two vowels or the 
 suppression of either; as, o akamba, you have spoken; here o is 
 the nominative to the verb, and a forms the immediate past tense. 
 Both must be preserved; but the harshness of speaking both sep- 
 arately must be avoided; so the m, a mere breathing, is put in to 
 bridge the hiatus, om akamba. 
 
 Note 3.— When the personal pronoun of either the first, second, 
 or third person is used as the subject of the substantive verb nle, 
 to be, it invariably takes the form of the objective case, thus: 
 
 OmCi doanla vcivd nle mie, 
 
 The person who lives there is me. 
 
 Omd be kenda gogo nle we, 
 The person who will go there is you. 
 
 Oma mewdnld inande ? nle ye, 
 
 The person that who ? it is him. 
 
 Note. — Almost any irregularity of construction throws the nom- 
 inative case into the objective form, and puts it after the verb. 
 
 The relative pronoun o, who, in the above sentences, coalesces 
 with final a in oma, into d. 
 
 KELATIVE pronouns. 
 
 30. The relative pronoun in the singular is o, and in the 
 plural wi, when relating to persons ; and when no question is 
 asked, thus : 
 
 VeW onlome o Jcenda vdvd, 
 
 Cal] the man who goes there. 
 
 Ganiba nVowanto o re go nago^ 
 
 Speak with the woniau who is in the house, 
 
 J/'5e Jcamha nVanlaga loi re g'owa7'o, 
 
 I will speak with the people who are in the canoe. 
 
24 MPONGWE GRAMMAK. 
 
 When an appellative or other noun stands for the antece- 
 dent, the relative pronoun must agree with it in declension 
 or class and number, thus : 
 
 Heri yasyo yi re gorowa, 
 
 Father our who is in heiven. 
 
 Ge syuge mhonli yi nye ntogolo, 
 
 Go scare the goat which eats the pepper. 
 
 Yag'' inkavi si rs gw^elende, 
 
 Bring the oars which are in the boat. 
 
 Nlunf egara zi re nVilamiha^ rw 
 
 Shut tlie cliest which has the cloth. 
 
 Got^ ingozyo si liairiba vdvd, 
 
 Catch the parrots which are talking there. 
 
 3fi tia ogitla wi singa vdvd,, 
 
 I fear the tornado wliich roars there. 
 
 JE heV Honda yi re gw'erere mezd. 
 
 He wants the fruits which are on that tree. 
 
 Azue peiiginV arfiaro mi Ma nlenld^ 
 
 We wait the canoes which come to-day. 
 INTEEROGATIVE PEONOUN. 
 
 31. Mande f who ? is used when refemug to persons, or 
 when asking a person's name, either of himself, or of a third 
 person. 
 
 Awe mande ? who are you ? Aye mande ? who is he ? 
 
 Ini nyd mande ? what is your name ? 
 
 Ijii nye mande f name his what ? 
 
 Nago meyd ya mande ? house that of whom ? 
 
 Wa mande is the plnral form, and is sometimes nsed at 
 the beginning of a sentence, sometimes at its close, thus : 
 
 Wi he panda go nkala wa mande,, or mande f 
 
 Those who will ascend to the town who ? 
 
 Wa mande samho wi he tig aula gw'elende f 
 
 Who therefore will remain in the hoat ? 
 
 Note 1 . — The plural here is to be distinguished from the pos- 
 sessive case singular, as follows : 
 
 •M Oytoanla mewdnld loa mande f 
 
 Child that whose, or of v/hora ? 
 
OKTHOGRAPHT. 
 
 25 
 
 Note 2. — The vowel e, with its inflecting consonants, is used as 
 a distinguishing interrogative, and always follows the noun, thus: 
 Ifago ye ? which house ? egomhe zye f What time ? 
 Owaro we ? which canoe ? izyage nye ? which duck ? 
 
 DEFINITE PRONOUN. 
 
 32. The term definite is used for want of a better defini- 
 tion, for nothing can be more indefinite than this little serv- 
 ant of all work, in some of its uses. It is sometimes a per- 
 sonal, sometimes a relative pronoun. Sometimes it is a preposi- 
 tion (of) or the sign of the possessive case. It stands entire, 
 it coalesces, it drops its own vowel (or being) to make a eu- 
 phonic concord ; and in almost every case, bj its consonants, 
 it makes the alliteral concord ; which is one of the peculiar 
 features of the Mpongwe language and its cognates. 
 
 The following table will show the classification of this pro- 
 noun, and its correspondence to the nouns in class and number : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plubal. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Pos. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Pos. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 1st Class . . 
 2d " . . 
 3d " . . 
 4th " . . 
 
 nyi 
 
 ya, or y' 
 
 za, or s' 
 wa, or ?/;' 
 nya, or ny"" 
 
 yo 
 
 so 
 
 wo 
 
 nyo 
 
 si 
 yi 
 
 y\ 
 
 mi 
 
 sa, or s' 
 ya, or y' 
 ya, or y 
 ma, or W 
 
 80 
 
 yo 
 
 yo 
 mo 
 
 Note 1. — The a in the possessive case is used only before nouns 
 commencing with a consonant, for euphony. 
 
 Note 2. — The nominative case stands immediately before the 
 verb, or after it, and in the latter case takes the objective form. 
 
 Note 3. — The nominative case is changed to the objective form 
 •when anything very definite or emphatic is to be expressed, and 
 still retains the place of the nominative before the verb. This 
 occurs more frequently when the verb is in the passive voice. 
 
 Ngozyo meydnld yo tdndo nde. 
 
 Parrot that it is loved by him. 
 
 Oioaro mewanld wome w'akdmhizo zuwe, 
 
 Cauoe that one itself it was chased hy us. 
 2 
 
26 MPONGWE GEAMMAK. 
 
 PAKTICLES. 
 
 33. The Mpongwe, like the English, has four parts of 
 speech called particles — the Adverb, the Preposition, the 
 Conjunction, and the Interjection. 
 
 ADTEEBS OF PLACE. 
 
 34. vH-vsnld, are vH, he is here ; wi re venld, they are here. 
 gun^ or gunlu, hither ; yogo gun, come here, 
 
 vdvd, there ; are vdvd, he is there. 
 
 Anlaga wi janja vdvd, People they work there. 
 
 go, or gogo, thither ; e hhida gogo, he goes there ; place 
 
 or direction. 
 mevdnld, in that direction, so ; directions or orders to a 
 
 helmsman. 
 . gwi, where, o Jcmda gwi f you go where ? 
 vingovlngo, around, from pingwa, to deflect, iraper, 
 
 reduplicated to vingovingo, round about. 
 haraba, near, igonho, above. 
 Tcili, for a short time, mi Tcenda g^oi'Mtanga MU, Tee 
 
 fwinlia, I go to the ship for a time and return. 
 
 ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 35. Jdni, day hefore yesterday ; jau, yesterday. 
 Nlerdd, to-day ; menle, to-morrow. 
 Mhanli, two ; day after to-morrow. 
 
 Jajangwe, presently ; e Ha jajangwe, he comes pres- 
 ently, soon. 
 Jangojango (of motion), softly, slowly. 
 Tete venld, ahia tete venld, he came just now. 
 PeTcepeke, pe henda pe Mnda, still going, still going, 
 continually, forever. 
 Many adverbs are in the form of regular verbs, having 
 different modes and tenses in use, as follows : 
 
 E he donge henda, he will first go. 
 Whdongi henda, they first went, or firsted to go. 
 -Vv^' Longe ja^a hd vange syeva : 
 
 '' First work and then play. 
 
ORTIIOGKAPHT. 27 
 
 Fa^ again ; efd hia^ lie again conies. 
 Yd fwinliinli, again return. 
 Wi ga vd -naige, they must again learn. 
 Sunga, soon, quickly ; zunge henda^ quickly go. 
 zunge fwinlianli, return ye quickly. 
 In these verbal adverbs the principal verb takes the impera- 
 tive jilural ending, when the nominative is plural. 
 
 Some adverbial conjunctions are used in the formation of 
 the Subjunctive Mode, and these are correlative. 
 e/a, or jdgd, if; gamhhile, then, pres. tense. 
 Kdnle^ if, gavdoild^ then, historical tense. 
 
 ADVEEBS OF MANNEE, CAUSE. 
 
 36. Nldnld, yenld, so, that is true, that is right. 
 Piere^ near, almost ; posyo, more ; polo, much. • 
 Ga, ga nte, as, so a:-. 
 
 G'dbwi, openly, boldly. 
 Vende, perchance, e vende Ma, lest he come. 
 vende jposwa, perchance you fall. 
 Yendetua, perhaps ; if it turn out. 
 Yencletua e halua, perhaps he change. 
 Yanganle, even ; vanganle gojua, even to die. 
 Yange nldnld, suppose it be so. 
 Toazange, it may be. 
 
 ADVEEBS OF NEGATION. 
 
 Wyawe, no, in answer to a question. 
 Byawege, no, emphatic ; rather slangy. 
 Pa, not ; e pa Jce7ida,.he has not gone. 
 Mi a mie, I do not know ; negative accent. 
 
 PEEP0SITI0N8. 
 
 37. These are few, but taking their special significations 
 from the verbs with which they are used, one preposition 
 answers many purposes. 
 
 Go, to, on, at, with, etc. ; akendi go nJcala, he has gone to 
 town. E pila go nJcala, he is from town. 
 
28 MPONGWE GRAMMAE. 
 
 Are go rtago, he is in the house. 
 
 Are gw'igala, he is in the street, or out of doors. Here 
 the is elided because coming before i^ and w is inserted as 
 a vinculum for the sake of euphony. Go^ when used with 
 reference to persons, is changed to gore y vtii ahia gore we, 
 I have come to you. 
 
 Hi a^ila gore ye, I am from him. 
 
 Mia, with ; e henda nla m.ie, he goes with me. 
 
 E janja nla wao, he works with them. 
 
 Nli, with ; the instrument : nil ntyambi, with a harp. 
 
 nVeremi, with an ax ; nli njali, with a gun. 
 
 nUinkavi s'ayogo, with paddles. 
 
 WcV, as the agent ; and is seldom, or never, used except in 
 composition with the objective case of the second or third 
 persons singular of the personal pronoun, making ndd and 
 nde, ijanja sijanjo ndd, the work which is worked by you. 
 
 Ntyonli y''avangio ndd, the wagon made by you. 
 
 Elende zavanlio nde, the boat hewed out by him ; used 
 with the passive voice. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Copulative Conjunctions. 
 
 38. Wli, and ; iddnibe nli rnbonli, a sheep and goat. 
 Anlome nVanto, men and women. 
 NVaghidi wao, and they went. 
 
 Ke, also ; awe he, o he Mnda, 
 
 you also, you will go. 
 
 Kd ; wonganli ye, hd jekelianli ye, take ye him, and 
 
 judge him. 
 Mte, as ; gamha nte pihilid, speak as you think. 
 Kdnde, because : akenda Icdnde afwelio, 
 
 he went because he was called. 
 
 Saml)o, therefore, consequently. E jdgd, samho azye 
 ngulu yi hia. Pie is sick, therefore he cannot come. 
 
 DISJUNCTIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 39. Vanganle, although, even if. Mi Mnda vanganle 
 
 wodu w^afwinlia, I go even if they all return. 
 
OETHOGKAPHT. 29 
 
 Ndo, but ; mi ajasi, ndo mi henda, I am tired, but I go. 
 Kao, exeept. Waodu w'dbienli, hao Hemamo, 
 
 All have come, except Eemamo. 
 
 Kdnde vonde^ for if. 
 
 Ka jporo^ much more. 
 
 Kclnde vonde ijiia s'avanginli nVipava soma mdri j 
 
 Ted poro * * * * loi he panginla gw'einenld nVomd 
 
 mdri, Jisu Krais. Rom. v. lY. 
 
 Note. — In Mpongwe, as in other languages, the different classes 
 of particles blend with each other in their uses, especially con- 
 junctions and adverbs. The above classification must, therefore, 
 of necessity be imperfect. 
 
 INTEEJECTIONS. 
 
 40. Interjeetions abound in frequency, but not in number. 
 The more common are the following : 
 
 Em,e ! wonderful ! did you ever ! 
 
 Mongisweni! About the same as the first, but much 
 
 coarser. 
 I^gd ! indeed 1 is it true ! implying doubt, or unconcern. 
 
 Well, what if it be so ? 
 Giligili, reti, true, affirmation. 
 Ei, ngwe ! O mother ! ngwe yam ! my mother ! 
 Yo ! that is right ; yo^ yenld, liria, so, thus, make fast. 
 Ydgdrenli ! hear, give attention. 
 
 Note. — These interjections and exclamations ai-e usually ac- 
 companied by very significant gesticulations, often more express- 
 ive than elegant. 
 
 YERBS. 
 
 41. The Mpongwe verb is almost unrivaled in the variety 
 extent and regularity of its inflections, 
 
 EEGULAE VERBS. 
 
 42. With the exception of less than a dozen, all tlie verbs 
 in the language are regular ; and they are inflected to mark 
 
30 
 
 MPONGWE GRAMMAR. 
 
 Conjugation, Yoice, Mode and Tense. The characteristics of 
 a regular verb are : 1st. That its incipient letter in the root 
 (Pres. Indie.) must be a consonant. 2d. That it must be of 
 two or more syllables. 3d. That it must terminate with a. 
 
 The consonants with which a regular verb can commence 
 are, b, d, f, j, k, m, n, p, s, t, and sy ; each one of which has 
 its reciprocal consonant, into which it is invariably changed 
 •to form the imperative and potential modes, and certain of 
 its past tenses. If the vei'b commence with 5 in the present • 
 indicative, the h is changed to w^ or the intermediate -y, to 
 form the imperative mode ; thus : mi honga, I take ; wonga, 
 take thoii ; 7)ii haga, I bring ; vaga, bring thou. If the verb 
 begin with cZ, the d is changed to I, thus : ini dcncia, I do ; 
 lenda, do thou. So f is changed to w^ or its intermediate v, 
 thus : oni fala, I throw ; wala, throw thou ; mi fela, I put ; 
 vela, put thou. In like manner j is changed to y, h to g, m 
 has no reciprocal, n to nl, I very slight, ^ to -y, 5 to s, t to r. 
 
 43. The following table will more fully illustrate these 
 changes, thus : 
 
 iNDICAXrVE. 
 
 E honga, he takes ; 
 E haga, he brings ; 
 E denda, he does ; 
 E fala^ he throws ; 
 E fela, he puts ; 
 E janja^ he works ; 
 E henda, he goes ; 
 E meniza, he iinishes ; 
 E noga, he builds ; 
 E jpanga, he makes ; 
 E songa, he follows ; 
 Etmda, he writes ; 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Wonga, take thon ; 
 vaga, bring thou ; 
 lenda, do thou ; 
 wala, cast thou ; 
 vela, put thou ; 
 yanja, work thou ; 
 genda, go thou ; 
 7)ienliza, finish thou ; 
 nloga, build thou ; 
 van.ga, make thou ; 
 song a, follow thou ; 
 renda, write thou ; 
 
 Note ], — The imperative singular takes the accent on the ulti- 
 mate syllable, the plural on the penult. Accents of negation in 
 the imperalivo are usually on the lirst vowel or initial syllable of 
 the word. 
 
r 
 
 OETIIOGEAPnY. ' 31 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 
 
 4:4:. Every regular verb Las a variety of derived forms, 
 made either by prefixes or suffixes, adding by these aug- 
 ments to the signification of the radical. And those modifi- 
 cations or species of the verb, for the sake of convenience, 
 we call Conjugations, very much after the manner of the 
 Hebrew Grammars. The Mpongwe verb has an unvarying 
 form of the passive voice, changing a final of the active into o. 
 
 Tliese Conjugations are simple, that is, taking a single 
 augment ; and compound, that is, taking two or more aug- 
 ments. 
 
 All the Conjugations except one, the reflexive, suffix the 
 augments. 
 
 I. EADICAL CONJUGATION. 
 
 45. This expresses the simple idea expressed by the verb, 
 without any modification whatever, unless it be by intonation 
 or accent. 
 
 Nmnber and person do not belong to the verb. 
 
 3Ii fonda, I love ; 'wi tondcf, they love ; 
 
 md khida, I go ; amcd Icenda, ye go. 
 
 II. CAUSATIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 46. This is derived from the radical by changing final a 
 into i, and suffixing sa, or, simpler, by changing final a into 
 iza ; thus, janja, work ; janjiza, cause to work. This gives 
 neuter verbs a causative or active sense ; -nanla, sleep ; nan- 
 lisa, cause to sleep. And very nearly allied to this, in form 
 and signification, is this : 
 
 hamha, speak ; Tcajnhia, intei'pret. 
 Mnda, go ; Mndia, guide. 
 
 III. RELATIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 47. This is formed from the radical by changing final a 
 into i, and sufiixing the preposition nla, thus : Jcwnha, speak ; 
 kambinla^ speak for, or to one ; janja, work ; janjinla, work 
 for one. The forms, hamla., speak ; Icainltia, interpret ; ken- 
 
32 MPONGWE GKAMMAE. 
 
 fi«, go ; Jcendia^ guide ; seem to be a compromise between 
 the Relative and Causative conjugations. 
 
 lY. FREQUENTATIVE CONJUGATIOaST. 
 
 48. This is used to express repeated or continuous action ; 
 and is formed by suffixing ga to the radical, thus : janja, 
 work ; janjaga, work continually ; jenla, look ; jenlaga, look 
 continuously, 
 
 Y. EEFLEXIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 49. Yerbs in this Conjugation have their subject and object 
 identical ; corresponding to the Middle Yoice in Greek, and 
 the Hitbpacl Conjugation in Hebrew. It is formed by chang- 
 ing the initial consonant of the radical into its reciprocal, and 
 prefixing sya, thus : ajoiila, he killed ; asyayonla^ he killed 
 himself ; amrjpi, he has improved ; asyame^i, he rectified 
 himself ; aholi, he struck ; asyawoli, he struck himself ; 
 e jovunlli, she is washing ; e syayovunla, contracted into 
 e sydvunla, she bathes. 
 
 YI. RECIPROCAL CONJUGATION. 
 
 50. This is formed by suffixing nla to the radical ; as, wi 
 hainha, they talk, or speak ; wi Tcambanla, they converse, 
 talk together ; wi tonda, they lore ; wi tondanla, they love 
 each other ; wi joinanla, they dispute. 
 
 YII. INDEFriSriTE CONJUGATION. 
 
 51. This is formed by reduplicating the radical, and chang- 
 ing the initial consonant of the reduplication into its recipro- 
 cal, thus : e kamha, he speaks ; e kamhagaiiiba, he babbles, « 
 talks at random ; e henda, he goes, walks ; e hendagenda^ he 
 walks to and fro with no object. 
 
 These Conjugations are exhibited at one view in the follow- 
 ing table : 
 
 1. liadical Conjugation. — Tcamha, speak. 
 
 2. Caus. " kanibiza^ cause to speak. 
 
 3. Relative " hamhinla, speak for^another. ^rt- 
 
 4. Frequent've " kamhaga^ speak continuously. 
 
• OETHOGEAPHY. 33 
 
 5. Heflexive Conjugation. — syaganiba, speak to oneself. 
 
 6. Reciprocal '' hambanla^ converse. 
 
 7. Indefiinte " kambagamha, babble. 
 
 The 5tli, reflexive form, is seldom, if ever, nsed witli Tcamba, 
 but is insei'ted for uniformity. 
 
 There is a variety of other forms of modifying the signifi 
 cation of words, but they are irregular verbs, thus : mi nya^ 
 I eat ; ml nyczs, I feed him ; mi jonga, I drink ; mi jooije, 
 I cause him to drink, or give him drink. And there is an- 
 other meaning to the word nyeza, feed ; nyeza mie ibe sam, /u.ivoc ^ :'r-fL-f* 
 cause me to eat my sin, or, annihilate me my sin. 'No one. '^ ' 
 
 word is properly used in all these Conjugations. 
 
 COMPOUND CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 52. By combining two or more of the simple conjugations, 
 we may form as many more. Thus the causative and fre- 
 quentative combined, form Jca7nhisaga, cause to speak con- 
 tinually. The causative, relative, and frequentative form 
 kamhinlasaga, to cause to speak to, or for, another continu- 
 ously. But the following table will exhibit this to the eye 
 better than words can describe it : 
 
 TABLE OF COMPOUND CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 1. ^amhizaga, causative and frequentative. 
 
 2. Jcamhinlaga, relative and frequentative. 
 
 8. hamhinlaza, relative and causative. " v' 
 
 4. hciTribinlazaga, relative, causative, and frequentative. 
 
 5. hambaganibaga, indefinite and frequentative. 
 
 6. hambagamblza, indefinite and causative. 
 
 7. hamhagamhizaga, indefinite, causative and frequentative. 
 
 8. TcainbagamMnla^ indefinite and relative. 
 
 9. kambagambinlaga, indefinite, relative, and frequentative. 
 
 This table might be extended, but this is deemed sufficient, 
 and not many single words can be used with all these conju- 
 gations; and not many of them are in common use with any 
 
34r MPONGWE GRAMMAR. 
 
 words. But any adult native will underotand and use all 
 these, and more, if need be. Each has a well-defined mean- 
 ing ; and each can be inflected through all the voices, modes, 
 and tenses, by the same rules and principles as in the radical 
 conjugation. The Yoices, Modes, and Tenses are all formed 
 on the initial and final syllables of the compound conjuga- 
 tions, indicating that the augments are considered as parts of 
 the woixls themselves. 
 
 Many verbs whose radicals are neuter or intransitive, are. 
 made transitive hy some of the conjugations. 
 
 Most of the verbs have not only an active and passive 
 form, but a negative, active, and passive form ; and verbs in 
 the middle voice take the negative form. 
 
 53. Negation is expressed : 1st. By the particle pa^ coming 
 immediately before the verb ; thus, o pa hela, you do not 
 want ; e pa T)ia, he has not come ; wi pa henda, they have 
 not gone. This pai'ticle is used principally, if not wholly, 
 with the indicative mode, present tense. 2d. By an accent, 
 usually on the first syllable of the verb, but sometimes on the 
 auxiliary to the verb ; and this accent often changes the tense, 
 without changing the form of the verb. Thus : Mi henda^ 
 I go ; mi lienda, I did not go ; emphatic, rai JcQnda du^ I did 
 not go at all, du being the radical syllable of the word all ; 
 mi agQnde, I will not go — positive refusal. This negative 
 accent troubles not only foreigners, but even natives, intelli- 
 gent and educated in their way, and sometimes they change 
 the structure of a sentence, that they may be sure not to be 
 misunderstood as expressing an afiirmative when they mean 
 a negative, or a negative when they mean an afiirmative. In 
 the future it changes neither form or tense ; thus, e he henda, 
 he will go ; e he IcBida, he will not go ; mi nk^^niba^ I did 
 not speak. Here a nasal sound, expressed by n prefixed to 
 the verb, makes an element in the negation. There are also 
 words which seem to be of themselves negatives, and contain 
 in themselves the substantive verb re : azyele, he is not ; 
 azya, contraction of the former, and used as a substantive. 
 Ga mie, not me, or not I ; used in prompt denial. These 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 35 
 
 last three ^^ords, each may take all the personal pronouns im-. 
 mediately following. Araiiga mie, not me. When a pro- 
 noun, subject of a verb, follows the verb, it always takes the 
 objective foi-m. 
 
 MODES. 
 
 54. The Mpongwe verb has five modes ; the Indicative, 
 Imperative, Subjunctive, Potential, and Infinitive. These 
 are identical with the modes as defined in Eng-lish g-rammars. 
 The Indicative is here treated as the radical form of the verb. 
 All the tenses are used in this mode. 
 
 55. The Imperative is formed from the Indicative by chang- 
 ing its initial into its reciprocal consonant ; thus, mi Jcenda, 
 I go ; genda, go thou ; e panga, he makes ; vangajiU, make 
 ye ; asue tenda, we write ; rendanli, write ye. There are 
 contracted forms of certain verbs, used only in the impera- 
 tive ; thus, oka, go ahead ; oJcanli, go ahead ye, from kenda, 
 go ; oviro, come on ; oviroanli, come on, from hia, come ; 
 yogo, come ; yogonli gunu, come ye here, seems to be a verb 
 used, only in the imperative. 
 
 STJBJTIlSrCTIVE MODE. 
 
 56. The characteristic of this mode is a prefixed to the 
 radical form of the verb, both in the conditional and conclu- 
 sive members of a sentence. The conditional particle, in the 
 present tense, is ja ; and the conclusive, gambenle ; ja mi 
 ahenda go nkcda, gambenle mi ajenle, if 1 go to town, then I 
 see (or shall see) him. This is the common simple form. 
 But a clause coming between the conditional and. conclusive 
 members of the sentence, often causes gamhenle to be dropped. 
 But the tenses vary these particle signs of the subjunctive 
 mode, as will be seen by the following example : J^do aroe 
 'nle, Krais e tongwa, gavdnld ikamhinli sazyo nVosaon wan- 
 yawe, But if Christ be not risen, or have not risen (Greek, 
 Perf. Passive), then is our faith vain. 
 
 In the perfect tense, Mnle is the sign of the subjunctive in 
 the conditional sentence, and gavdnld in the conclusive ; and 
 
36 MPONGVv'E GEAMMAE. 
 
 in simple cotiset-utive sentences a is prefixed to the verbs in 
 both. 
 
 POTENTIAL MODE. 
 
 57. The characteristics of this mode are, changing the in- 
 itial consonant of the radical into its reciprocal, and the final 
 a into ^, and placing th^ particle ga before the verb, thus :. 
 
 7ni ga gende go inTcala^ 
 
 I must go to town. 
 
 azue ga gambe nla 'Wao, 
 
 we must speak with them. 
 
 oywanla e ga ronde ngi ye, 
 
 child he must love mother hia. 
 
 anlaga wi ga venginle gw'elende, 
 
 people they must wait in boat. 
 
 For urgency the plural takes the ending of the imperative 
 
 plural : 
 
 azue ga ghidenli^ 
 
 we must surely go. 
 
 Another form of the Potential Mode retains the form of 
 the radical, and takes the auxiliary I'd instead of ga, and the 
 subjective of the verb is usually in the objective case ; 
 
 Awe hd janja ? You can work ? 
 Ih, m.ie lid janja. Yes, I can work. 
 "With the auxiliary td the same forms hold. 
 
 INFINITrVE MODE. 
 
 58. The sign of the infinitive is go, before the radical form 
 of the verb, thus : Mi kenda g'^oloiiiba go Tcola, I go up the 
 river to trade. But when the infinitive follows immediately 
 the preceding verb, the particle go is dropped : 
 
 e hele fwinlia, he wants to return. 
 Tni he hove nha/vi, I go bring the oar. 
 
 Here he is a contraction from henda, go. Ifi tbiule nenga, 
 I love to learn. The verb tonda is also used with another 
 meaning, aronde henda, love not to go ; or, never mind going. 
 
OKTIIOGBAPHT. 37 
 
 This mode is also nsed thus : are go henda, he is to go. 
 
 ■ Another structure makes a greater change : w'akendi go 
 
 janja aUng' ipa, they went to work and get pay. Aleng' is 
 
 here in the conjunctive form, and retains the same mode and 
 
 tense as the preceding verb. 
 
 TENSE, NUMBER, AND PERSON OF VERBS. 
 
 59. Except in the imperative plural, verbs have no change 
 or form for number or person. 
 
 Four consecutive tenses are formed by changes on the verb, 
 without the aid of auxiliary particles. 
 
 60. The Present tense is identical with the English. E Mn- 
 da, he goes. 
 
 The immediate Past tense is formed from the present b}' 
 dropping e and prefixing «, thus : akenda^ he has gone ; but 
 is within sight, or call. Whether the personal pronoun e, of 
 the present, is changed to a^ and is still a pronoun, or whether 
 the a is to be construed in some other way, is not yet settled. 
 
 61. For want of a better term we designate another the 
 Paulo Past tense. It indicates time farther advanced than 
 the immediate past, but not extending beyond to-day. It is 
 formed from the immediate past by changing final a into *', 
 thus : akendi, he has gone. 
 
 62. The historical tenge indicates indefinite past time, not 
 including the present day ; and is formed from the paulo past 
 tense by changing the initial consonant into its reciprocal, 
 thus : agendi, he went. 
 
 63. The perfect tense is formed by placing the substantive 
 verb are as an auxiliary before the radical, and the particle 
 ^a after it, thus : are Jcendaga pa, he has gone. 
 
 Another construction puts the subject of the verb between 
 the auxiliary and the verb, thus : 
 
 yi re mie fela pa g'oga wd, 
 
 which I have put in hand thine. ' 
 
 But here Tnil?, nominative to fela, is in the objective form. 
 
 64. The pluperfect tense is formed by placing the past 
 
38 MPONGWE G'EAMMAE. 
 
 tense of the substantive verb duo before the paulo past 
 tense of the verb, thus : aduo akendagi, he was, he Avent ; or 
 he had gone ; or, mi aluo 7)ii akendagi, I was, I went, or I 
 had gone. 
 
 65. The first future tense is formed by placing before the 
 radical the auxiliary particle he, thus : e he Tcenda^ he will go ; 
 wi he hmda, they will go. 
 
 QQ. The second future is formed from the first future by 
 placing before it the substantive verb duo in the immediate • 
 past tense, thus : aduo e he henda, he will have gone ; or, lit- 
 erally, he was, he will go. 
 
 67. There is also another form of a past tense used in nar- 
 ration, but becoming obsolete. This form also takes the nom- 
 inative after the verb, and then repeats the verb in a different 
 form, thus : 
 
 Nle he hidia Anyamhie awuUnie Noah, inle, 
 
 And spake God He spake to Noah thus. 
 
 The initial particle nle is frequently omitted. There are 
 other tenses formed by accents, which will be better illus- 
 trated in the paradigm of the verb. 
 
 IRREGTJLAE VERBS. 
 
 68. These are not numerous, neither is it necessary to give 
 a full list, or an extended analysis of them. Avoro, know ; 
 used only in the present indicative, and used regularly with 
 all the numbers and persons of the personal pronouns : 
 
 Agami, dislike ; same rule as above. 
 Oha, sin. OTcanli, pi., go ahead. 
 OvirOy sin. Oviroaidi, pi., come on. 
 
 The last two used only in the imperative. 
 
 Gka is doubtless contracted from Mnda, go. Oviro is also 
 contracted from hia, come. Bia, come ; rnia, know ; and 
 others containing only a diphthong, are treated as monosyl- 
 lables, and are formed like pa and nya, to give, eat ; thus : 
 'mi pa,l give ; mi ajoenli I have given ; Tni a/venli, I gave. 
 
ORTHOGKAPHY. 39 
 
 Ge nya, go, eat ; and some others are contractions, and 
 used only in the indicative and impei-ative. Toa is used as 
 an auxiliary, sometimes as a principal verb, but usually with 
 a conditional sentence. Some of the substantive verbs are also 
 irregular. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE VERBS, 
 
 69. There is a number of verbs used with this signiiication, 
 but most of them with other meanings. lie is used exclu- 
 sively to express existence, as, are, he is ; yi re, it is ; and is 
 used only in the present tense. Pegaga is a regular verb, 
 used principally to express existence in the past tenses. 
 
 JDoanla is also a regular verb, used to express existence, 
 but more commonly has the meaning of dwelling. Duo is a 
 contraction from doanla, sometimes used to express being, 
 but more commonly is an auxiliary to form tenses, thus : adiio 
 akendagi, he had gone, or he was, he went. 
 
 Wle answers often the purpose of a verb of existence, but 
 its nominative is always in the objective form, and usually 
 comes after the verb, as, nle mie, it is me. Toa is also used 
 in the sense of to be, and to become, thus : " Sa^nho atoe mie 
 mhia, atoe wao nibia, "yenld agamhinli sue, yenld he ayiviri 
 nlue ": " Therefore, whether it be I, whether it be they, so 
 we preached, and so ye believed." 1 Cor. xv. 11. 
 ^^Are he toa jpa Hdlond'' alonga^' 
 
 He has also become tlie fruit first. 
 
 Toa is a regular verb, used in most of "the modes and tenses. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE VERBS NEGATIVE. 
 
 70. There are a number of words that express negation of 
 existence or denial of fact, and are used principally in the 
 present tense. 
 
 Aranga ye, not him ; aranga nlue, not you. Ga, contrac- 
 tion of aranga, and used in strong positive denial ; ^a rnie, 
 not me. Zyele y azyele, he is not ; wi zyeli, they are not ; 
 yi zyele, it is not. Conti-acted, azye vcivd, he is not there. 
 Zya, contracted from same, and with a prefixed, makes sub- 
 
4:0 MPONGWE GKAMMAK. 
 
 junctive mode ; azya mie, gamhcnle apera, if not for me 
 then he had perished ; azya we, gwmhenle mi ajita, if not for 
 yon then I had died. 
 
 Most of these words, followed by the preposition nU, ex- 
 press possession or ownersliip, thus : are nli njali, he has a 
 gun ; wi re nVadd-mbe, they are with (or possess) sheep. So 
 also the negative ; asyele nil nyare, he is not with (does not 
 possess) a cow ; azye nVezdma, he has not a tiling. 
 
 The regular substantive verbs express the same in the past 
 tenses. All might be arranged in modes and tenses, but with 
 the irregular it would be only a repetition of the numbers 
 and persons of the pronouns. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Tl. Not every word that we translate from the Mpongwe 
 by a participle, or that we are compelled so to translate, can 
 properly be called a participle. It is doubtless difficult to dis- 
 tinguish all the forms that might be placed under this part of 
 speech, but a few will be noticed. 
 
 Y2. The most numerous class of participles is that formed 
 by prefixing n to the frequentative conjugation, thus : denda, 
 do ; ndendaga, doing ; Tcenda, go ; nkendaga, goiil^> This 
 is frequently used with an emphatic repetition after the same 
 verb, thus : e janja njanjaga, he works working, or he works 
 vigorously and continually ; e jufa njufaga, he steals steal- 
 ing, or he does nothing but steal. It is formed also with the 
 reciprocal and frequentative conjugations, thus : jcinja, work ; 
 anloine iiT arilome njanjanlag'' agamla mi ntymdi, men with 
 men ^^•ol•king that which is unseemly ; working mutually, in- 
 tensely and incessantly. 
 
 73. Another form of expression we are compelled to trans- 
 late with a participle, but the analysis of the Mpongwe sen- 
 tence is somewhat doubtful : 
 
 Tombare p'anto nVawanla, 
 
 Throwing; out women and children ; 
 or. 
 
 Besides women and children. 
 
OETHOaRA-PnY. 41 
 
 Another form is this 
 
 Ngwe avienli, oijwanli yejuwa pa, 
 
 The motlier came-, her child having died. 
 
 Aioe vie nVincnga, ha Mnda go nhala, 
 
 You having Gnished learning, can go to town. 
 
 Njdgu jono pa, anlga w-anyenli ye^ 
 
 Elephant being killed, the people they ate him. 
 
 There is also another form of the passive : 
 
 JSfVavegagie gogo g''orove, sydriago nle Setan.^ 
 And he was there on the desert tempted by Satan. 
 
PAE ADIGM 
 
 OP THE 
 
 REGULAR VERB KA3fBA, TO SPEAK. 
 
 Radical CoNJUGATioisr. 
 Active and Passive Yoices. 
 
 I*^EGATIVE AND AfEIKMATIVE. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 74. ^ \ Act. e Tcamba^ lie speaks. 
 
 Pass, e kam^o, he is spoken. 
 
 Act. e h^niba, he does not speak. 
 
 Pass, e h^iinbo, he is not spoken, 
 
 ti) j Act. a gMYibe^ he does not speak (intensive). 
 
 !^ ( Pass, a gsiijibo, he is not spoken" to (intensive). 
 
 
 Immediate Past Tense. 
 75. ^" j Act. a Icainba^ he spoke (within an hour, or two). 
 ^ I Pass, a hainbo, he was spoken " " " 
 
 bb j Act. e pa TcamTja^ he spoke not. 
 ^ I Pass, e jpa hamlo, he was not spoken. 
 
 Paulo Past Tense. 
 7C. ^" \ Act. a hainbi, he spoke (to-day, an hour past). 
 < i Pass, a hambio, he was spoken (to-day, an hour past). 
 ti \ Act. e pa Tcarnba, he did not speak. 
 !^ ( Pass, e pa Jcarribo, he was not spoken. 
 (42) 
 
PARADIGM. 43 
 
 * Historical Tense. 
 
 11. ^ j Act. o, gamhi, he spoke. 
 
 < I Pass, a gamhio^ he was spoken. 
 
 Act. e l&2i7nba, he did not speak. 
 
 Pass, e himbo, he was not spoken. 
 
 
 Perfect Tense.* 
 T8. ^ j Act. are hamha ])a^ he has spoken. 
 
 < \ Pass, are hamho pa, he was spoken. 
 
 bh j Act. e 2)a hamha, he has not spoken, 
 '^ \ Pass, e pa Jcanibo, he was not spoken. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 T9. ^' j Act. a luo aJtamhi, he had spoken. 
 
 < \ Pass, a luo ahamhio, he had been spoken, 
 bb j Act. e duo akamhi, he had not spoken. 
 
 ^ ( Pass, e duo ahanibio, he had not been spoken. 
 
 First Future Tense, 
 e he hamha, he will speak. 
 e he hamho, he will be spoken. 
 e be hamha, he will not speak. 
 e be hamho, he will not be spoken. 
 
 Second Future Tense, 
 e he duo ahamhi, he will have spoken. 
 e he duo ahamhio, he will have been spoken. 
 e d\xo agamhi, he will not have spoken. 
 e dxio agamhi, he will not have been spoken. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 Affirmative Active. 
 82. ^3 ■? I Sing. Gamha, speak. 
 
 80. 
 
 1 \ ^«t- 
 < { Pass. 
 
 
 
 bD i Act. 
 « ) Pass. 
 
 81. 
 
 i i Act. 
 < ( Pass. 
 
 
 
 bb \ A.ct. 
 
 
 ^ '[ Pass. 
 
 
 ^'^ j Plu. Gamhanli, speak ye. 
 
 a O ^ 
 
 Sing. Gamhare, speak (emphatic). 
 Pin. Gamharenli, speak je (emphatic). 
 
M MPONGWE GEAMMAR. 
 
 P ^ 
 ^ o 
 
 Sing Gamhisa, cause to speak. 
 oo I piu. Gambisanli, cause je to speak. 
 g-g" j Sing. Gamhizare, cause to speak (emphatic). 
 <^^ I Plu. Gamhisarenli, cause ye him to speak (em- 
 phatic). 
 
 Remark. 
 All the simple and compound conjugations foraa their im- 
 peratives by the same rules. 
 
 Affirmative Passive. 
 83. ;g-5' j Sing. Ganibo, be spoken. 
 
 (§5 ( Plu. Gamlwnli, be ye spoken. 
 
 g-S" j Sing. Gambiso, cause to be spoken. 
 
 uo I PIq, Gamhisonli^ cause ye to be spoken. 
 
 Remark. 
 In the passive voice the imperative mode is less used out 
 of the radical conjugation. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 84. Sing, ag^kinba, speak not. 
 
 Plu. agMYibanli, speak ye not. 
 
 Sing. ar2^nde^ hamiba, you need not speak. 
 
 Flu. arSiude Jca'iribenli, ye need not speak. 
 
 Sing. Rig'' Sigaiiriba^ leave not speak (Donb. l^eg.) 
 
 Plu. Rig^ a-gamhanli, leave not speak ye (Doub. Keg.) 
 
 Rem,arJc. 
 The simple verb takes the negative accent on the second 
 vowel, and the prefixed a makes a part of the negative ele- 
 ment. The auxiliary verb tonda, to love, takes the accent in 
 the same manner. The auxiliary tiga, to leave, contracted to 
 Rig^ in imper., throws the negative accent on to the initial 
 vowel, of the verb, making a double negative. In the ex- 
 pression (very common) rige Jcamha, the form and force of the 
 negative is in the auxiliary rige, leaving the verb in the form 
 of the indicative present. 
 
PARADIGM. 45 
 
 SUBJTJNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 85. ^ j Act. Ja mi ahamba, if I speak. 
 
 < \ Pass. Ja mi ahambo, if I am spoken, 
 bi j Act. Ja mi aga.ml)a, if I speak not. 
 
 ^ ' Pass. Ja mi agixmbo, if I am not spoken. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 86. ^' ( Act. Kdnle mi ahambi, if I spoke. 
 
 < \ Pass. Kdnle m,i alcamblo, if I was spoken. 
 
 Historical Tense. 
 
 87. ^ \ Act. Kdnle mi agamM., if I sj)oke. 
 
 < ( Pass. Kdnle mi agambio, if I was spoken, 
 tj) j Act. Kdnle mi nh\mba, if I did not speak. 
 !^ I Pass. Kdnle mi nkdimbo^ if I was not spoken. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 88. ^ ( Act. Jr(?5 inle mi akamhi., if I have spoken. 
 
 < I Pass. -4rodmZ6 772^o^Zrw?5/o, if I have been spoken, 
 ix) j Act. ^rO(3 ^7^Ze mi hiimba., if I have not spoken. 
 "^ I Pass. Aroe inle m,i kdLinbo, if I have not been spoken. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 89. ^ j Act. Kdnle rni aluo mi alcambi, if I liad spoken. 
 
 < I Pass. Kdnle mi aluo me ahambio, if liad been " 
 bi) ( Act. Kdnle mi ndwo mi alcambi, if I had not " 
 
 '^ { Pass. Kdnle mi ndno mi aJcambio, if I had not 
 been spoken. 
 
 CAUSATIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 » 
 
 90. £ j Act. Ja mi akambisa, if I cause to speak. 
 
 < i Pass. Ja mi akambiso, if I am cansed to speak. 
 Neg. Same as the radical conjugation. 
 
46 
 
 MPONGWE GKAMIVIAE. 
 
 91. 
 
 92. 
 
 11 
 
 Imperfect Tense. * 
 
 Act. Kdnle mi akarnbizi, if I caused to speak. 
 Pass. Kdnle 7ni akaonbizio, if I was caused to speak. 
 
 Historical Tense. 
 Act. Kdnle mi agmnbizi, if I caused to speak. 
 Pass. Kdnle mi agamMzio, if I was caused to speak. 
 Act. Aroenli milc^imbiza, caused not to speak. 
 Pass. Aroenli mi h^nhizo, if was not caused not 
 to speak. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 93. Act. Kdnle mi are hambiza jya^ if I have caused to 
 
 speak. 
 Pass. Kdnle mi are Tcambizo ;pa^ if I have been caused 
 
 to speak. 
 
 Xst Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 94. r Act. Kdnle mi aduo mi akambizi^ if I had caused 
 to speak. 
 
 Kdnle mi aduo mi ahamhizio^ if I had been 
 
 caused to speak. 
 Kdnle mi nduo oni aTcambizi, if I had not 
 
 caused to speak. 
 Kdnle mi aluo mi ahambizio., if I liad not 
 
 been caused to speak. 
 
 2(^ Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 95. r Act. Kdnle mi aluo mi agarrMzi, if I had caused 
 to speak. 
 
 Pass. Kdnle mi aUio mi agambizio, if I had been 
 
 caused to speak. 
 Act. Kdnle mi duo mi agambizi^ if I had not 
 
 caused to speak. 
 Pass. Kdnle mi duo mi agambizio, if I had not 
 
 been caused to speak. 
 
 Note. — The formation of tenses, and also of the forms of the 
 negatives, are the same in the remaining Simple and in all the 
 Compound Conjugations. 
 
 he , 
 
 Act. 
 Pass. 
 
 Act. 
 Pass. 
 
 Act. 
 
 
PARADIftM. 47 
 
 The correlative of Ja or Jdga, is Qambeiile. The correlative of 
 Tcanle is Qavanld. Example : 
 
 Ja mi akenda, gambetile awe Ted tiganla, 
 If I go then you can remain. 
 
 Kdnle o luo venld, gavdnld . . . . e tdjnwa du. 
 If tliou hadst been here, then .... he had not died. 
 
 John xi. 32. 
 
 POTENTIAL MODE. RADICAL CONJUGATION. 
 
 PTesent Tense. 
 
 96. ^" j Act. Mie hd hainha, I can speak. 
 
 < [ Pass. Mie hd hamlo, I can be spoken. 
 ^ j Act. 2li ga gaonbe, I must speak. 
 
 < \ Pass. Mi ga gambo, I must be spoken. 
 fcb j Act. 3£i &.gaml)a, I must not speak. 
 
 '^ \ Pass. Mi agambo, I must not be-spoken. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 97. ^ j Act. 3fi aid 'kaTnba, I might speak. 
 
 < \ Pass. Mi aid kambo, I might be spoken. 
 gc j Act. Mi t'k hamba^ I could not speak. 
 
 "^ \ Pass. Mi t-d hambo, I could not be spoken. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 98. Act. Mi ard kambi, I might have spoken. e 
 Pass. Mi ard kanibio, I might have been spoken. 
 
 Act. Mi nta, kamha, I might not have spoken. 
 
 Mi ntsi kavibo, I might not have been spoken. 
 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 99. Akendi go kamha, he went to speak. 
 Ake' kamba, he went to speak. 
 A7'e go janja, he is to work. 
 Aleganli go kamha, forbid not to speak. 
 E toa go juwa., he goes to die. 
 JE kenda go kola, he does not go to trade. 
 
48 
 
 MPONGWE GEAMMAK. 
 
 Go is the proper sign of the infinitive, but in the folloA\dng 
 examples go ia omitted : 
 
 Ehele noge. nago^ he wants to build a house. 
 Mi tnnde hole mpunji, I love to buy ivory. 
 Zunge hove nhavi, quick bring an oar. 
 
 In these examples the governing verb coming directly be- 
 fore the infinitive, drops go, and changes final a into e, and 
 the verbs oioge, hole, and hove coming directly before nouns 
 commencing with a consonant, change the normal a into e. 
 
 PAETICIPLE, 
 
 100. 
 
 Act. 
 Pass. 
 
 Act. 
 Pass. 
 
 Act. 
 
 Pass. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 JSfhamhaga, speaking. 
 Nhamhago, spoken to. 
 Kamhinlaga, speaking with. 
 Kaimhinlago, spoken with. 
 
 Past Tense: 
 Kamhaga pa, having spoken. 
 Kamhago pa, having been spoken. 
 Tomhare pa, having thrown out. 
 vie nli janja, ha vange sheva, 
 
 having finished working, then plaj'. 
 
 • A LIST OF SOME ADVERBS. 
 
 Baraba. Near, in time or place, or number. 
 Baraha nli mpcinld, near the path. 
 Baraha nVomjnima w'ard, near a whole year. 
 Baraba nli ntausen, near a thousand. 
 Bo. Far oif. Are bo, he is far away. 
 Bunya. At dawn. Bunya, gamhenle azu' ahendga. 
 In the early dawn, then we go. 
 Bwebwe. Openly, boldly. 
 Go bui. Openly, boldly. E henda go bni, ndo 
 mpanginli ga ntyd/ria, he walked not 
 openly, but as it were in secret. 
 
A LIST OF SOME ADVERBS. 
 
 49 
 
 • JBuku. Openly, plainly, from v. hukunla^ to speak 
 boldly ; intensive, hukunla huhu. 
 NV avukunlie igamba tnenydnla T)uTcu^ 
 
 and he opened word that boldly, plainly. 
 
 Dadie. Only. 2Iie dadie f I only ? 
 Dava. Far off. Elende zi re dava^ the boat is far 
 away. 
 Davadava. Intensive of last. 
 
 Genld. Neither. 2£i Icimba nla toao, genld iy\kilia 
 osaon Tnewdnld, I did not speak at all 
 with them, neither think of that aifair. 
 Gohosyo. Ahead. Are gobosyo, he is ahead. 
 
 Gogo. There. Wi Jchida gogo^ they go there. 
 Gontye. Below. TF^re^c»^^2/<?, they are on the ground. 
 Wi suminla go ntye^ they descend to earth. 
 GotHenld. Just now. Wapegaga gunlu gotevenla, 
 They were here just now. 
 Gunlu. Here, Are gunhi., he is here. 
 Yogo gun, come here. 
 Gw'igonlo. Above. Inydnli si dogwa gwHgolo, 
 
 birds they fly above. 
 
 Yuginlia yi dandalanda go ntye, 
 
 Insects they crawl on the earth. 
 
 Jajangwe. Presently. 31i hia jajangwe, I come pres- 
 ently, by and by. ♦ 
 Jdnli. Day before yesterday. 
 Jan. Yesterday. 
 KendeTcende. Softly, softly. Genda nla ye Teende hende 
 hdnde are nla sijdgd, go with him very 
 softly, because he is very sick. 
 Kwekwe. Sufficient. 
 
 Kwe. Very little. Genda kwe, go a little way. 
 Zyusya hwe, move alon^ little. 
 Kwevimo. Little shut them, a wink, an instant. 
 Mhiambie. Well. Ore mhiamhie f are you well ? 
 
 Menle. To-morrow. Mi hia menle, I come to-morrow. 
 Ulenld. To-day. E Icenda nlenld, he goes to-day. 
 3 
 
50 
 
 MPONGWE GEAMMAK. 
 
 Nleganlega. Quickly. Genda nleganlega, go in haste. 
 Ngwa. Sliut. Nago yi re ngioa, the house is shut. 
 Wje. Ajar. Igugi nyi re nje, the door is ajar. 
 Nldnla. Thus, so. Atoe idanld^ it happened thus. 
 Nlenld. To-day. 
 
 Nyawe. ]^o. Jcenda .^ do you go ? Nyawe^ no. 
 NyoAJoenyawe. To no effect, for nothing. Azw akendi vd 
 nyawenyawe, we went for nothing. 
 Nyawege. No, sir-ee, by no means. Genda nla mie. 
 . vdvd, go with me there. JVya/wege, by 
 no means. 
 Pekepeke. Contracted from pe henda, jpe henda, still go- 
 ing, still going ; forever and ever. 
 Pele. Soon, quickly. Genda pele, go soon, imme- 
 diately. 
 Piere. Near. Atoeiili piere nVowatanga^ he has 
 come near the ship. 
 Polo. Very. JE jdgd polo., he is very sick. 
 Pegd. Crookedly. E henda rega, he walks crook- 
 edly.' 
 Pelanganlo. Crosswise. Pere yi re relanganlo, the sticks 
 are crosswise, or crossed. 
 Tetevenld. Just now. Abia tetevenld, he came just now. 
 Vanga. So. Vanga-nldnla, mi 2igende, even if so, 
 I will not go. 
 Vdtevenld. Just now. Ajanja vdvd vdtenenld f he was 
 working there just now. 
 Vdvd. There. E doa/nla vdvd.,\\&\\y&& \hQ,x&. 
 Yei. Here. A re vei, he is here. 
 Yendetua. Perhaps. Vendetua wi hia, perhaps they 
 will not ccme. 
 Yende. Lest. Genda neganega, e vende pera^ 
 
 »| Go quickly lest he escape. 
 
 Yenld. Here. Wi Ma venld, they come here. 
 Yia. Entirely. Wanyenli sodu via, they have 
 eaten all entirely. 
 Yiaganlo. Beyond. Wdkendi maganlo nVowata/ngdy 
 
A LIST OF SOME ADVERBS. 51 
 
 they went beyond the ship ; more than. 
 Winld w'anlengi viaganlo nla mewdnld, 
 these learned more than those. 
 Yenld. So. Yanja yenld, work so. 
 
 Donga. First. A donge Tchida^ he first went. 
 
 Sunga. Quickly. Zunge 5*«, quickly come. 
 
 Many adverbs are used as adjectives, and in the same form. 
 The last two adverbs in the list are specimens of a large class 
 in the form of regular yerbs, used adverbially, in the differ- 
 ent modes and tenses, and uniformly standing next before the 
 principal verb. 
 
 102. For an imperfect list of Prepositions, Conjunctions, 
 and Interjections, see Paragraphs 37, 38, 39, 40. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 103. Every proper name, or name of person, standing be- 
 fore the verb, takes the personal pronoun between it and the 
 verb, thus : Njiwo e heiida go nhala, Njiwo she goes to town. 
 Angile e hole m^pimji, Angile he buys ivory. 
 
 Every common noun also takes its deiinite pronoun in the 
 same manner, thus : 
 
 Mbonli yi Ha, the goat it comes. 
 Izijage nyi dogwa, the duck it flies ; and 
 Izydge ny''adogwi, the duck it flew. 
 
 In the last sentence i coming before a is dropped. 
 
 Otutu wl panda, the smoke it rises. 
 Enlingo zi powa, the tide it ebbs. 
 
 NOimS AJifD NOUNS. 
 
 104r. The possessive case is f onned by the use of the defi- 
 nite pronoun standing between the noun limited and the noun 
 of possession, thus : Nago y'^Onleme, the house of Onleme, or 
 Onleme's house. Nhavi y^elende si Nttika, oar of the boat 
 of Ntaka, or oar of Ntaka's boat. Inyoi ny^ordmbd, the voice 
 of the trumpet. 
 
 In all cases the definite pronoun must agree in number and 
 class with the preceding noun, thus : Ahdnda mi ntyaga yi 
 Keiya, the plantains of Keiya's garden. In this sentence mi 
 agrees in number and class with aJcdndd, and yi with ntyaga. 
 When the following noun commences with a vowel, the i of 
 the definite pronoun (or articulation) is dropped, and the frag- 
 ment, a consonant, is attached to the noun of possession with 
 an apostrophe. 
 (52) 
 
• SYNTAX. 53 
 
 NOUN AND ADJECTIVE. 
 
 105. The adjective which qualities or limits the noun stands 
 after it, and must be of the same number and class, thus : 
 
 i 
 
 JVago mpolo, house large. 
 
 Sinago simjpolo sirribia, houses large good. 
 
 Ezango evolo, book large. 
 
 Tango volo, books large. 
 
 Oldvi ola, river long. 
 
 Ilciv^ ila, rivers long. 
 
 Sijavi sida, leaves long. 
 
 The same rule of arrangement and agreement applies to all 
 the adjective pronouns. Instead of my house, it is house 
 mine, book yours, hat his, etc. 
 
 106. For the use and construction of personal, definite, ad- 
 jective, and interrogative pronouns, see Paragraphs 20-23, 
 and 29-32. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 107. Usually in a direct affirmation or narration, the sub- 
 ject (or nominative) of the verb stands before it. But in a 
 conjunctive sentence the subject of the verb follows it ; and 
 if a pronoun, is incorporated with it after the manner of the 
 Hebrew, thus : NV awulinlie ivao, and said he to them. 
 
 In that sentence the preposition to, is contained in the verb 
 itself. But if the subject be not a pronoun, the verb is re- 
 peated after the nominative, thus : NVaveli Jon aveV inlengi 
 ye. And called John, he called his disciples. NVayimri 
 Jisu awiilinlia wao. And answered Jesus and said to them. 
 
 In the above sentence, at the second verb, awulinlia, the 
 initial a makes what is called the conjunctive form of the 
 verb, which form is in very frequent use. 
 
 Nouns have no case form ; but wherever a pronoun is the 
 subject of a verb and follows it, the pronoun takes the form 
 of the objective case. 
 
 NV awulinlie wao, and he told them. 
 
 NVawulinlio ye nla wao, and was told him by them. 
 
64 MPONGWE GKAMMAE. 
 
 In the above sentences, one active the other passive, the e 
 and ye are both subjects of the verbs, and are both in the ob- 
 jective form. 
 
 When the subject of a verb is a noun, and comes before the 
 verb, the personal pronoun uniformly stands between the 
 noun and the verb, thus : Angile e haTriba, Angile he speaks. 
 Sonia e janja, Sonia he works. 
 
 Mhonli yi re vdvd, the goat it is there. 
 
 A verb seldom follows a verb (in the same sentence) in the 
 same form, though all be in the same mode and tense, thus : 
 JV^do rdndanV ilovalooi yanl'i^ hd dende mbia, azunga, but 
 love your enemies, and do good, and lend. In this sentence 
 the first verb, rdndanli^ is imperative plural; the second, 
 dende, is in the form of the indicative present ; the third, 
 azunga, is the conjunctive form, which is the form of the 
 imperative sin. with a prefixed. But frequently, when two 
 or tliree verbs follow in a sentence as above, all in meaning 
 in the imp. plu., the second takes the imp. plu. ending, and 
 the third is in the conjunctive form, thus : RdndanV ilovalo- 
 vi yanli, kd dendanli mbia azunga. 
 
 108. One peculiarity of this language is the very frequent 
 use of the passive voice. The natives love it. Instead of 
 saying. And Jesus rebuked him, it is, NVazembio ye nli Jisu^ 
 and he was rebuked by Jesus. Instead of. Whatsoever thou 
 shalt ask, it is, Ezdin' edu zi he 'bambio ndd, Whatsoever sliall 
 be ask5d by you. JE tondo nVanlaga, he is loved by the peo- 
 ple, and not, The people love him. Inya si nyo mie, food 
 eaten by me. 
 
 SALUTATIONS. 
 
 109. 1. Sali, singular. Salenli, plural. 
 
 2. 3Iholo, singular. Mholoanli, plural. 
 
 The first is the salutation after long absence, or on the arri- 
 val of strangers. The host, sitting, receives them in silence, 
 until all have been seated for a space of time. He then gives 
 the salutation or welcome, Salenli, welcome. They respond, 
 
SYNTAX. 55 
 
 Ai, soli he^ jea ! welcome, thou. After a minute or two, and 
 perhaps passing a few words, the host commences the common 
 salutation, Mholomili^ and the response, Ai, mbolo he, or 
 mholoanli he, if there be others with the host. If there be 
 special friends, long separated, they throw their arms around 
 each other's shoulders, with the salutation, Samba, strongly 
 accenting the final syllable. The salutation always begins 
 with the host, never with the visitor. If there be no salutation 
 there is mischief intended. Depart. 
 
 If tiiere be frequent meetings during the day, the pass-word 
 is aibio, sin., abionli, plu. 
 
 ADIEUS. 
 
 110. 31i ahhidaga, I am gone. 
 
 Ai, gendaga Tnhiamhie, yea, go prosperously. 
 
 Mi ahendaganli, plu., I am gone you. 
 
 Ai, gendaga mMamhie, yea, go prosperously. 
 
 Asue hendaganli, plu., we are gone you. 
 
 Ai, gendaganli mhia/nibie, yea, go ye prosperously. 
 
 ANOTHER FORM. 
 
 111. 3fi ahia go tiginld ojanli, 
 
 I have come to leave thee, good-bye. 
 
 "Mi ahia go jpango.nla, nVawe, or nVanlue, 
 
 I have come to promise with thee, or with you. 
 
 The response is, Gendaga, or gendaganli, mbiamhie, 
 
 Go thon, or go ye, prosperously. 
 Note 1. — In the above salutation, Mbolo is the adjective old, 
 applied principally to persons. It is made into an iri-egular verb, 
 imperative mode, and. the plural is a regular imperative plural, 
 3Ibo7oanli. 
 
 Note 3, — The Mpongwe verb for salute is hogizya. If a^ person 
 do not hear or heed a salutation, he is told, e bogizyd, he salutes 
 you ; or, mi abogizya. To refuse a salutation is to offer the grossest 
 uisult, and a slave will resent it. 
 
 NoT& 3. — If a person be going to King George's, another will say 
 to him, Wogizya mie Renjugo. Salute, me Renjogo. 
 Or, Wogizyanli mU anlaga wi re vdvd, 
 Salute ye me the people who are there. 
 
56 MPONGWE GT?AT\nvrAB. 
 
 ELISIONS AND CHANGES OF YOWELS. 
 
 112. Reinarh. — Where euphony requires it, vowels are 
 elided, or coalesce. The elision is usually made of the final 
 vowel of the word standing first. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 113. A verb ending in «, followed immediately by a noun 
 commencing with a^ e, i, or o, elides its final vowel. 
 
 -£' tond^ awanla, he loves children. 
 
 Venjavenf agaml) ainbia, keep good words. 
 AvMP avia, despise not the good. 
 , £ sunginV ikugi, he saves the poor. 
 E jiv' ilasa, he knock off an orange. 
 
 Tl^^ tenV ilcdndd, they are cutting a plantain. 
 Azue Tcof iddmM, we catch a sheep. 
 Yag'' epioi^ bring a chair. ' 
 E honV epoholo, he puts on a hat. 
 
 heg' erere zmganli, you cut another's tree. 
 
 Ge diiV okandci^ go pick cotton. 
 
 A'bd)ij'' ofhenlo we, he cut his finger. 
 
 Punctuation^ or anything producing suspension of voice, or 
 hiatus, between words, obviates elision or change of vowels. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 114. Nouns ending in a elide the final vowel when stand- 
 ing next an adjective commencing with a vowel, only it coa- 
 lesces with into a : 
 
 Anlag' awenge, people many. • 
 Aly ainbia, mangoes good. 
 Oma ompolo, is Oin' d'inpolo, person large. 
 Ngw' ogdi, mother-in-law. 
 Oni' dmbia, person good. 
 But Owar' ompolo, canoe large. 
 Ozy'' onibia, face beautiful. 
 Egar' evolo, chest large. 
 EzdrrC evia, a thing good. 
 
SYNTAX. 57 
 
 Prepositions are usually elided for euphony. Oo avienli 
 anlaga amdri nli elende ezenle. This sentence is spoken, 
 and properly wi-itten, thus : 
 
 Ow'amenV anlag' amdri nVelend' ezenle, 
 
 When came people other ivith boit other. 
 
 In Gw^ the w is only a vinculum in place of o. The other 
 four contractions follow the common rule of elision. 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 115. IS'ouns standing next before pronominal adjectives 
 with final a, change a to *, thus : igambi nyam, my word ; 
 ivangi nye, his law ; agdngt masyo, our spears. Bii^rather, 
 agdng^ hnazyo ; Iga/niV inyam / ivaiuj' inye y thus eliding 
 a, and joining i to the pronoun, where it belongs. 
 
 I^ouns terminating in other vowels remain unchanged, thus : 
 ihdndd nye^ his plantain ; imenlo yao, their lingers ; Owaro 
 wazyo, our canoe ; Ozunge wd, your Saviour. But wiite, 
 ihdndd ^nye, his plantain ; iinenlo ^yao, their lingers ; Ozunge 
 ^wd, your Saviour. For, ask a man, elende zinld za-mande ? 
 boat this whose ? He replies, izain.-^Ozyede winld waman- 
 de? this spoon whose? He replies, iwd, yours. ^ l^okolo 
 ineyd yamande ? whose hats those ? He replies, iyao, theirs. 
 Thus the *, which probably belongs to the pronominal adjec- 
 tive5» in the first examples, has been transferred to the noun, 
 and in the last examples has been elided. These ai'c sug- 
 gestions for consideration. 
 
 EWIKIA— Dakk Sayings. 
 
 116. This is a language spoken only by the elders, and used 
 only in their secret councils ; though the secret council may 
 be held in open assembly. It is formed by changing words, 
 and making a Babel. Tree, may mean a fish ; water, may 
 mean a gun ; gorilla, may mean a ship, and life, may mean 
 death. And the verbs are transmuted in the same manner. 
 No cipher telegrams ever equaled it for confusion and ob- 
 
58 MPONGWB GRAMMAK. 
 
 scuritj. And no man under twentj-iive years of age is ini- 
 tiated into it, and then with the most binding oaths of secrecy. 
 
 GENEEAL REMAEKS. 
 
 IIY. Although these Central and South African dialects be 
 flexible, soft, musical, and abounding in euphonic concords, 
 and though their grammatical structure be so methodical, con- 
 sistent, and uniform, and the classification of the substantives 
 and their adjuncts, and the conjugation of the verl)S be almost 
 unrivaled, yet it is not claimed that this is the perfection of a 
 language for commerce, the arts, and sciences of a highly civ- 
 ilized state of society. But the present form of the M])ongwe 
 language is amply sufficient for all present necessities, and its 
 pliability will doubtless render it equal, to all future contin- 
 gencies. Many of the dozen and more conjugations will 
 rapidly fall into disuetude, and most of the definite pro- 
 nouns will be dropped. These changes will come gradually 
 from necessity, and not by revolution or revisions. 
 
 The pliability of the language is seen in the rapidity with 
 which it has been Christianized, and a large class of its words 
 adapted to the expression of Christian ideas and principles in 
 the translation of the whole New Testament and a part of the 
 Old, and is readily understood by the people. 
 
 118. If one ask how the language of the Mpongwes has 
 been cultured to such grammatical order and euphony, it will 
 be difficult to answer. 
 
 119. If it be asked how it is kept in such exactness and 
 purity Mnthout dictionary, grammar, spelling-book, or alpha- 
 bet, there is a ready answer. A man's standing in society d e- 
 pends uponhis speaking wel]L_an d that includ es grammar, 
 rhetoric, ^ndelocution. A mother never allows ungram- 
 niatical speech or inaccurate pronunciation in the child. She 
 says, Epwi wilnd, chair this. The instant exclamation of the 
 mother is, £Ji o?f wami I ngi yd mande f Oh,' my child ! 
 who is your mother ? JEpwi sinld, putting emphasis on sinld, 
 that is not easily forgotten. If the child had said ofTienlo 
 
GENERAL BEJtfAEKS. 69 
 
 wmld, this finger, it would have been correct. But epwi 
 winla could not be tolerated, except in a foreigner who is at- 
 tempting to speak, and he will be tolerated in anything. 
 Such a training will preserve the spoken language of a peo- 
 ple in its purity, better than all the dictionaries and gram- 
 mars that ever were written. 
 
 120. The Proverbs of the Mpongwes form a large part of 
 their current literature, and their songs are never exhausted. 
 
 Solomon spake three thousand proverbs, and his songs were 
 a thousand and five. But there is little probability that he 
 originated three hundred of the proverbs, or one hundi'ed and 
 five of the songs. 
 
 Proverbs originate with the people, and probably most of 
 them in the more primitive state of society. And the prov- 
 erbs of the Mpongwes are worth preserving. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 MPONGWE LANGUAGE, 
 
 AMERICAN MISSIONARIES, 
 
 GABOON, WEST AFRICA. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 MISSION HOUSE, 23 CENTRE STREET. 
 
 1879. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAKY. 
 
 Abe, 3 pi. Burying-place. 
 Abio, pi. abioni. Salutation 
 
 for second meeting on same 
 
 day. 
 Ahobo, 3 pi. Lungs. 
 Abol'e, a. Speckled. 
 Abuhwe, 3 pi. Yaws. 
 Adune, n. Small yellow bird, 
 Agali, 3 pi. Oil, vegetable or 
 
 animal. 
 Agafiii, v. Hate, ir. and def ., 
 
 used only in Indicative Pres- 
 . ent. 
 Agei, a. Fresh (water), see 
 
 Nkei. 
 Ay audi, 3 pi. Apprehension, 
 
 anxiety, sorrow. 
 Aguga, 3 pi. Trouble, dis- 
 tress, desolation. 
 Ai. Reply to the salutations, 
 
 " Mbolo"" and " Abio." 
 Aha, 3 pi. Sap. 
 Akdtdld, 3 pi. dovi'' akdtdld. 
 
 To kneel down, let set the 
 
 knees. 
 Ahaga. A hea d- warrior. 
 Ahete. "Aghast, pK syum' 
 
 akete. 
 Ahe, 3 pi. Laughter. 
 Ake^a, pi. akcvani. Thank 
 
 you, def. verb and n. 
 Ahoma. A head-wind. 
 ATcidu, 3 pi. V. Bribe ; pay for 
 
 buying something for an- 
 other. 
 ATculu. A disease of fingers 
 
 and toes. 
 Alatd, 3 pi. Fellowship. 
 
 Al ugu, 3 pi. Spirituous liq- 
 uors, palm- wine. 
 AtnaraJi'anlo, 3 pi. Forks (of 
 
 a road). 
 Amanli, 3 pi. Grass. 
 Amale, 1 irreg. (s. and pi. same). 
 
 A fabulous kind of animal. 
 Ambilie, 3 pi. Modesty, false 
 
 delicacy. 
 Ambe-nlingo, 3 pi. Milk. 
 Amenje, 3 pi. Peace, quiet. 
 Ampandia, 3 pi. ' Flood, flow- 
 ing (of tide). 
 Ampunli, 3 pi. Foam, froth. 
 Ande, rel. prou. What. 
 Angola. Scarlet, colored cloth, 
 
 red flannel. 
 Aniko, 3 pi. Swollen hmbs 
 
 from rheumatism, 
 Anlingo, 3 pi. Water. 
 Anlima Apparition, any 
 
 strange unaccountable thing 
 
 happening, specter. 
 AjnZwOj^ 3 pi. Money, articles 
 ''^S rtrade, sometiines singular. 
 Anka, a. Privately, apart 
 
 from othors, alone. 
 Anlango, 3 pi. Smell, stench. 
 Anti/d-vinld, 3 pi. Sleep. 
 Anlue, pers. pron. 2d pi. Ye, 
 
 you. 
 Anyafnia , 3 pi. Ebb (tide). 
 Anyambie. The Creator, God. 
 Aionga, n. Former time, at 
 
 first. , 
 
 Alongi bosyo. Persons who 
 
 have died before. 
 Any eg e, 3 pi. The fringe of 
 
 a cloth, etc. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Aludofelia, n, A tree, the 
 bai-k of which is used in 
 healing wonnds. 1 
 
 Ard, a. All, whole, entire, 
 complete. 
 
 Are, n. Poison. 
 
 Arovi, 3 pi. fx torn. Vomit. 
 
 Asegd, 3 pi. Foretaste. 
 
 Asise, 3 pi. Bashfnlness. 
 
 Atdnlia, a. Spotted. 
 
 Atd, aux. part. Had. 
 
 Ati\ 3 pi. Fipces, excrement. 
 
 AtinJa, 3 pi. Stern (of boat, 
 ■ canoe, etc.) 
 
 Avende^ 3 pi. In place of. 
 
 ( Take a hat in place of a chest. 
 
 1 wang' opokolo gwa' vendo m' ogara. 
 
 Avoro, V. ex." Know, def. v. 
 
 only Indicative Present. 
 A ronlo, 6 pi. Skill, cunning. 
 Awangempondo,T\. A species 
 
 of antelope. 
 Awdgd, 3 pi. Palsy. 
 
 A fiyp per.pron. ad sins. Thou. yoa. 
 -T^<-c, y^ ,. ., erop. Thon, thyself. 
 
 Ai/enjinla, ad. At dav-break, 
 early. 
 
 Aye^ pers. pron. 3d sing. He. 
 
 Asue, pers. pron. 1st pi. We. 
 
 Asuemc, pron. Ourselves. 
 
 Asyingo, 3 pi. Anguish, ex- 
 treme. 
 
 Azyo, 6 pi. jNIouth of a river. 
 
 Azyile, 3 pi. Pain, grief, dan- 
 ger. 
 
 Asyigwazyigwa. A smaU 
 scrub. 
 
 B. 
 
 Ba, pL, JBani, ir. v. Here, 
 take it ; mostly in offering 
 a thing. 
 
 JBa, ad. Down ; in phrase, 
 hola ha, tlirow down. 
 
 Baga, v, i. Bring, fetch. 
 
 Baginlo, v. in. T(» have a 
 
 thing brought to one by 
 
 chance. 
 Bahdjolia, ad. All about, all 
 
 over ; of tracks on beach. 
 Bala, V. t. Inspect ^i farm); 
 
 to keep watch at night. 
 Bala. Awake. 
 Baha, v. i. To inquire the 
 
 piice of anything. 
 Balca, V. t. Kindle (lire). 
 BaJtU, part. To stumble. 
 Bakunta, v. t. Intei-fere, 
 
 meddle ; answer for another. 
 Bainhioj, V. t. Ask. 
 Bamha, v. t. Shine, 
 Bamhiza, v. t. Cause to shine. 
 Baminlii, v. t. Blaze. 
 BaiTiinUa, v. t. Cause to 
 
 blaze. 
 Banda)mnla, v. t. Be care- 
 ful of ; mind. 
 Banda, ad. Tight ; fast. 
 Banda, v. t. To have sexual 
 
 commerce with. 
 Bandiza, v. t. Prostitute ; 
 i cause to commit adultery. 
 I Bandanla, v. t. Cohabit to- 
 t gether, man and woman. 
 ; Bandisa, v. t. To make fast. 
 ' Bangatia, v, t. Jam, press, 
 
 squeeze, crowd ; to fasten 
 
 with button. 
 Bango, ad. Cut asunder. 
 Bango nla hatigo. Trading 
 
 without trust. 
 Bdngunlia, v. t. Separate ; 
 
 divide. 
 Bangwa, v. t. Separate, di- 
 vide ; be apart. 
 Bangwanla, v. i. Separate 
 
 from each other. 
 Bana, v. i. Be suspended, 
 
 hung up. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAET. 
 
 Banlia, v. t. (KeleheW). Hang 
 
 up, suspended. 
 Bara, v. in. To be in the 
 
 hahit of doing. 
 Baraba, ad. Near. 
 Bare, adverbal verb. Many 
 
 times. 
 Batia, v. t. Join, put togeth- 
 er, 
 Bata, ad. Perched, seated. 
 Bataininla, v. i. Ah'ght. 
 Bate-mpira. A keg ; powder. 
 Basa, X. t. {Bazya). Skin ; 
 
 cut up animals and birds. 
 Bd, a. Alive. 
 Bdhci, ad. Leaky. 
 Bddia, v. Be imgrateful, ex- 
 press ingratitude. 
 Bdla, V. in. To get up at 
 
 night, to seek to destroy by 
 
 witch poison. 
 Bali, ad. Clear, quite, wholly, 
 
 entirely. 
 Bdli, ad. Within. 
 Bdnda, v. i. Ripen ; red. 
 Bdndia, v. cans. To ripen. 
 Bdnda, v. i. To become angry. 
 Bdnjunla. Finish off (a canoe, 
 
 etc.) 
 Bdnla, ^A. Rot. 
 Bdnja, v. i. Cut, wound. 
 Bdnjanla, v. i. To be cut 
 
 with knife ; wound. 
 Bdra, v. t. Wear (clothes). 
 Be, aux. v. Will. 
 Benga, v. t. Name of a tribe. 
 Bega, v. t. Fell (tree). 
 Bekelia, v, t. Trust in. 
 Bela^ V. t. Want, seek. 
 Benda, v. t. Be angry. 
 Bendiza, v. t. Cause one to 
 
 be angry. 
 Bendinla, v. t. Be angry at 
 
 any one. 
 
 Benga, v. t. Follow. 
 
 Bengwhi, v. i. To be, or 
 come or go close to one. 
 
 Benla, v. i. Be or become 
 hot. boil (water). 
 
 Bcha, V. Stick a thing fast, 
 seal. 
 
 Beria, v. To allay pain, apply 
 medicine, stick on, as a plas- 
 ter. 
 
 Berinla, v. t. Accuse falsely. 
 
 Bede, t. ad. Indentation, 
 bruised. 
 
 Bedia, v. t. Bruised ; indent. 
 
 Behunia. Divide, break in 
 two. 
 
 Behiva, v. i. Divide in halves. 
 
 Bmgtinla, v. t. Define, ex- 
 plain, interpret. 
 
 Benla, v. t. Phmt, bury. 
 
 Beniba, v. t. Watch, (a thief, 
 etc.) 
 
 Beta, V. t. Name ; call ; sup- 
 pose. 
 
 Beta, V. Suppose, mean. 
 
 Beya, v. To luff. 
 
 Bia, V. i. Come. 
 
 Bika, V. t. Hate. 
 
 Bilia, V. t. Preserve the re- 
 mains of a meal. 
 
 Bilia, V. t. To be shy of, coy, 
 reserved, bashful ; not for- 
 ward. 
 
 Biiiibioj, V. t. Respect, rever- 
 ence. 
 
 Binda, v. t. Knead, mix. 
 
 BindaJcanlia, v. t. Mix. 
 
 Blnla^ V. t. Skim. 
 
 Bioga, v. i. Belch. 
 
 Biia. To stop people fight- 
 ing ; make peace. * 
 
 Biviria, v. t. Respect, rev- 
 erence, regard, honor. 
 
 Boj ad. Far away. 
 
8 
 
 MPOXGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Boanganya^ ad. Arrived at. 
 £oba, a. Lop-sided, one- 
 sided. 
 Bobiza^ V. t. Half sheet. 
 Boga, V. t. Chew, masticate ; 
 
 to crack with teeth. 
 Boginla, v. i. Cry aloud ; 
 
 bhister. 
 Bogizya, v. t. Salute one 
 
 with " MloloP 
 Bogianla^ recip. conj. Salute 
 
 one another. 
 Boka^ V. t. Bark. 
 Bohci, V. t. Dig out (canoe). 
 Bohwa, V. i. To cave in (well) ; 
 
 gi-ave ; open. 
 Bolanganla^ v. i. l^oss about, 
 
 as canoe in wave. 
 BolinVohuw' ihajpa g^osaon. 
 
 To glory in. 
 Bola^ V. t. Whip, ])eat, strike. 
 Bola {njali). Discharge (a 
 
 gun). 
 BoJa (as ngdma). Beat (drum). 
 Bola (itu). Crack (a joke). 
 Bola {epo). Use (indecent 
 
 words). 
 Bola (ba), v. t. To throw 
 
 down ; e. g., ^ cow. 
 Bola {isapoga). To slap with 
 
 open hand. 
 Bola {ikapa). To boast. 
 Bo)jwa, V. t. Arrive ; come ; 
 
 to go to a place. 
 Boywa, v. i. Appear in sight ; 
 
 be rich. 
 Boijioa, V. i. Leak. 
 Boijwu, n. Loom, 
 Bongu7nia, v. To bubble up. 
 Bongunla^ v. t. To bring up 
 * an orphan. 
 Bongeni. Bung. 
 Bonda, V. t. Concert ; a plan ; 
 
 cum Mondd. 
 
 Bonla, V. i., lonVepoholo. To 
 put on a hat ; cover a house ; 
 put on (liat). 
 
 Bonla, V. t. Empty, pour out. 
 
 Bonlanla^ v. i. To upset, cap- 
 size. 
 
 Bonlio, V. p. Be empty ; des- 
 titute of, ahonlio anliva. 
 
 Bowunlia, v. t. Appear ; en- 
 rich. 
 
 Bozya, n. To groan, or strug- 
 gle in death. 
 
 Bosyo (with go). Ahead, be- 
 fore. 
 
 Bd^ or ho, a. Alive. 
 
 Bonga, v. t., or hdnga. Take. 
 
 Bdnglnla, v. t., or hon. Take 
 away, deprive. 
 
 Bongo nValugu, or hdngo. 
 Drunk. 
 
 Bu, ad. Reclining, down. 
 
 Buehue (with go). As well as. 
 
 Bue, a. Dead. 
 
 Bue, a. Open, unobstructed, 
 clear. 
 
 Buha. Strangle. 
 
 Buhu, ad. Plainly, openly, 
 fearlessly (of speaking). 
 
 Bukunla, v. t. Speak with- 
 out fear, boldly, plainly. 
 
 Bidia,v.t., Ja. Say, tell, speak. 
 
 Bunja, V. t. To break, or 
 follow an animal. 
 
 Bunla, vi. Be many ; abound, 
 increase. 
 
 Bunlia, v. t. Make to be 
 many, multiply, increase. 
 
 Bunde. A small insect. 
 
 Bundii, ad. Upside down. 
 
 Bundtcnla, v. i. Boil (as spring 
 of water). 
 
 Bundunla, v. t. To stir. 
 
 Bundahaida, v. t. Break, 
 spoil. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Biondakanla, v. i. To spoil. 
 Bunya. The next day. 
 Bumha, v. t. To go and get 
 
 a wife. 
 Bumba, v. t. To snatch, as 
 
 children, food. 
 BunibuUa, y. t. To scatter 
 
 about and spoil. 
 Buta, V. t. Seelv. 
 BurinUa, v. t., nVompisa. To 
 
 dash one's self to the earth. 
 Bwata, V. t. To touch. 
 
 D. 
 
 Da, nda, ad. Long. 
 
 Dadie, ad. Alone. 
 
 Daga, v. i. Chirp, bleat, 
 
 scream, squall. 
 Dagalaga^ v. i. Complain, 
 
 grumble. 
 Daginla, v. t. Desire, long 
 
 for. 
 Dalia, Y. i. Cross (river, etc.) 
 Bambe, ad. Soon. 
 Daminla, v. t. To stretch or 
 
 reach out. 
 Banda, v. t. Deny. 
 Banda, v. i. Creep, crawl ; 
 
 go on all-fours ; walk. 
 Bandua, v. i. To be re- 
 deemed, redeem one's self. 
 Bandunl'%, v. t. Eedeem. 
 Baginla, v. t. Lose utterly. 
 Baia, v. To meet. 
 Batanla, v. i. Meet, assemble. 
 Batiza^ V. t. Ciuse to meet 
 
 or assemble. 
 Bava, V. and a. Tall, be tall ; 
 
 long ; be distant. 
 Baviza, v. t. Make tall, 
 
 lengthen, spin out ; talk. 
 Bavinla, v. i. Extend, reach 
 
 after. 
 
 Bavia, v. t. Give, entrust, 
 
 bestow, hand to. 
 Bavadavie, ad. Distance, far 
 
 away. 
 Bd, ad. Silent, still. 
 Bd, contra, of daJco. Master 
 
 or mistress. 
 Bddinla, v. t. Peep, spy. 
 Bdga, v. t. Curse. 
 BfiMHa, V. t. Bow (the head). 
 Bdmba, v. t. Conquer, op- 
 press. 
 Bdminla, v. t., v. i. Sink, 
 
 drown. 
 Bdnddlia, v. t. Flatter. 
 Bdsya, or ddsyu, v. t. Worth- 
 less, as fools. 
 Bdva, V. t. Fiah (with hook). 
 Bdvdddvd. Outer or great 
 
 darkness. 
 Bdmnla, v. i. Keach out, as 
 
 with the hand. 
 Bega, v. t. Stop, prevent. 
 Be?nha, v. t. Taste, try. 
 Bemha (as mlenge), v. t. Take 
 
 aim. 
 Bemha, or dembianla, v. t. 
 
 Spar, wrestle. 
 Benda, v. To do, make. 
 Benla, v. i. Cry. 
 Bevanla, v. t. Forget. 
 Bevinla, v. i. Hope, think, 
 
 suppose ; seem to one's 
 
 self. 
 Bevinla, v. t. To impute. 
 Be, ad. Quickly, immediately. 
 Beha, V. t. Catch (a thing 
 
 thrown). 
 BeJa, V. i. and a. Soft ; weak. 
 Beladela, a. Very soft. 
 Belisa, v. t. Soften, weaken. 
 Bemhia, v. i. Bow, bend the 
 
 body. 
 Bembiea^ v, t. Bend. 
 
10 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Dernhialenibia, a. Supple, pli- 
 able. 
 
 DemMnlia, v. i. Bow down. 
 
 Dhnhiaiila, v. i. Kace. 
 
 Denda^ v. To begin to go up, 
 as the tide. 
 
 Denga, v. i. Get, find, obtain. 
 
 Dcnginlia, v. t. Ileacli up, to 
 a thing abov^e. 
 
 Dengelia, v. t. Disrespect, 
 dishonor. 
 
 Diano^ ad. Apart ; far apart. 
 
 Diana, n. Disposition. 
 
 Dienga, ad., or die' used with 
 Riga. Alone. 
 
 Dienga, ad. (with tigd). Let 
 alone. 
 
 Dimhinla, v. t. Put, place, 
 lay down, 
 
 Dingilia, v. i. Mark, take no- 
 tice. 
 
 Dinga, v. i. Be a long time. 
 
 Dira, a. Heavy. 
 
 Diria, v. t. Honor. Prov. iii. 9. 
 
 Diria, v. t. Tie, make fast. 
 
 Divinla, V. t. Enclose, sur- 
 round, obstruct, shut out and 
 in. 
 
 Diva, V. t. Prov. i. 14. Be 
 with ; take part with. 
 
 Doanla, v. i. Live, be. 
 
 Dogunlia, v. i. Go away quiet- 
 ly or secretly. 
 
 Dogwa, v. i. Fly, leap, bounce. 
 
 Doha, V. t. Knock. 
 
 Dolo, ad. Seated ; shine. 
 
 Dorrihinla. To become old; 
 decrepid. 
 
 Dominlia, v. t. Begin (a 
 work). 
 
 Dondoa, ad. High. 
 
 Donga, a. and v. i. First, and 
 Be first. 
 
 Dongo, n. SmaU-pox. 
 
 Dovia, v. t. Put or place on, 
 mostly on tire ; set upright. 
 
 Dovalova, v. i. Be at enmity. 
 
 Dov, ^ahdtdld, v. t. Kneel. 
 
 Dova, V. t. (with Mjpaga). 
 Doubt, bet, dispute, disbe- 
 lieve. 
 
 Dova, V. t., as rJyale, tune, 
 erere. Set, put, place, es- 
 tal)lisli. 
 
 All and ad., at all ; with sing ; 
 
 om'edu, any person ; ez&m^edu, 
 y anythinsf. 
 
 Diiha, V. t. Honor (as parent), 
 
 as subject a king. 
 Duhwa, V. i. Depart, get 
 
 away. 
 Dud a, V. i. Be weary. 
 Dudia, V. t. Cause to be 
 
 weary, tire. 
 Duere. Quiet. Prov. i. 33. 
 Duha, V. t. Butt, strike. 
 Dukanla, v. i. Butt each 
 
 other. 
 Dula, V. t. Pluck, pull (Com.), 
 
 to pull out or off. 
 DuTnba, v. t. Surprise. 
 Dumhinla, v. t., i. g. dirnhinla. 
 
 Put down. 
 Dufna, V. i. Swell. 
 Duminla, v. t. Strive, ago- 
 nize. 
 Duo, V. i. Be at or in a place. 
 Dunlo, V. t. Be at a place 
 
 with another ; find one there. 
 Dura, V. t. Pull, haul. 
 Durinla, v. t. Attract, draw 
 
 to. 
 Duvia, V. t. Sop, dip. 
 
 E, pers. pron., A. He or she. 
 Ehdbago, 2. Saw-fish. 
 Ehaganlo, 2. Resemblance. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 11 
 
 Ehaka^ 2 pa. A garden-knife. 
 
 Ehandanlie, 2. Adulterer. 
 
 Ehanda^ 2. Skin. 
 
 Ehaba^ 2. Any worn-ont or 
 spoiled thing. 
 
 Embdngdinhdngd, 2. Knee- 
 pan. 
 
 EheJce, 2. Fire-place. 
 
 Ehelahela, n. Precipice. 
 
 Ehende, 2. Corpse. 
 
 Ehe,^. An herb? (Gen. i. 11). 
 
 Ehe Z'atanga. Purslain. 
 
 Ehole, 2. Fist. 
 
 Ehohe, 2. Cripple, so can not 
 walk. 
 
 EhoTco^ 2. Loins, small of 
 back. 
 
 Ehogonyo, 2. Apparition, 
 vision. Luke i. 22. 
 
 Ehubu, n., 2. A bundle of 
 bamboo leaves. 
 
 Edddd, 2. Eye (of needle). 
 
 Eddsyu, 2. Fool ; vain fel- 
 low. 
 
 Eddsyd, 2. Foolislmess. 
 
 Eddhu, n. A small fetich. 
 
 I Picture, Ikeness used only 
 of persons; for tilings 
 and animals, egdlanli and 
 mbondinli. 
 
 Edingo, 2. Crying, scream- 
 ing, "wailing. 
 EdOi 2. Bar (at mouth of 
 
 river). 
 Edinga, 2. Cassada garden, 
 corn or pea-nut patch. 
 /if^^ Editge, 2. Cork, stopj)le. 
 ,^ T^Eduka, 2. Pistol. 
 f>' Edukatdnda, 2. A fruit, grows 
 on vine. 
 -'Edungu, 2. Great; affair. 
 Edurinlia, 2. A thing which 
 
 draws another. 
 Ejizaghige, 2. Water-spout ; 
 
 whirl-wind. 
 Efu, 2. Blanket. 
 
 Efinlizya, 2. Render (as money 
 lent).' 
 
 Efanga, 2. Fear, or afraid. 
 
 Efangiza, 2. Cause to fear. 
 
 Efelia, 2. Cause to call. 
 
 Egamhanyamhia, 2. ISTon- 
 sense. 
 
 Eganlo^ 2. Fetish (for de- 
 tecting adultery, theft, etc.) 
 
 Egara^ 2. Cliest. 
 
 Egdndd, 2. Dependent ; ward ; 
 apprentice ; disciple. 
 
 Egdlanli, 2. Likeness, same- 
 ness. 
 
 Egdlanli, 2. Leprosy. See Ga- 
 it mli. 
 
 Egdmha. 2. Shave, drawing- 
 ing-knife, etc. 
 
 Egdmha, 2. Parable ; a round- 
 about reproof. Nathan' to 
 David. 
 
 Egdnga, 2 and a. Poor, lean. 
 
 Egdnli, 2. Cascade, cataract, 
 ritie. 
 
 Egdgdli, 2. (See ekalcali). 
 Adam's apple (in the thro.it). 
 
 Egero^ 2. An ear of corn. 
 
 Egenlizo, 2. Measure, with 
 which to measure quantity 
 or length. 
 
 Egeza, 2. ' Auger, gimlet. 
 
 Egege, 2. "Tusk of ivory weigh- 
 ing less than 20 lbs. 
 
 Egenga, 2. A white spot on a 
 black person, 
 
 Egomhe, 2. Time. 
 
 Egomhogava, 2. A kind of 
 small fish. 
 
 Egorozimha, 2. An ear of com 
 with the husk on. 
 
 Egoro, 2. Sheath. 
 
 Eguwa, 3. A fathom. 
 
 Eguva, 2. Snot; cold in the 
 head. 
 
12 
 
 MPONaWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Egionlu, 2. Anger. 
 
 Egwa, 2. Kind of yam. 
 
 Egwasya, 2. Saw ; file. 
 
 Egwaro, 2. Trigger. 
 
 Ehi^ 2. Throne, king's seat ; 
 power ; dominion. 
 
 Ekaga, 2. Land turtle. 
 
 Ekale^ 2 and a. Pride ; con- 
 tempt and proud. 
 
 Ekaka^ 2. A load, charge of 
 a gun. 
 
 Ekambie, 2. Interpreter, 
 spokesman. 
 
 Ekanda^ 2. Tinder ; also a 
 wild animal. 
 
 Ekasa, ad. To scold, speak 
 harshly. 
 
 Ekdkd^ 2. Cause, reason. 
 
 Ekdkdli, 2. Adam's apple. 
 
 EkaiTi'mla, 2. Peg, pin (of 
 wood). 
 
 Ekdga^ 2. Log, fallen tree. 
 
 Ekdidd^ 2. Phlegm. 
 
 Ekdngwe^ 3. Humpback. 
 
 Ekdtd, 2. Defense ; pick- 
 ets. 
 
 EMikei, 2. Lifant, baby. 
 
 Ehemhe, 2. Animal poison, 
 venom. 
 
 Ekenje, 2. Intense pain. 
 
 Ekeva, 2. Pity. • 
 
 Eko, 2. A kind of bituminous 
 soil. 
 
 Ekokore, 2. Cock, rooster. 
 
 Ekoka, 2 {z'oJileTrhbe). Honey- 
 comb. 
 
 Ekolo, 2. A kind of fish. 
 
 Ekoiribasyanli, 2. A kind of 
 bird. 
 
 Ekoio^ 2. A quiver for ar- 
 rows. 
 
 Ekomho {zi njinla), 2. A 
 head ; gorilla. 
 
 Ekotagota^ 2. Touching. 
 
 Ekuka, 2. A thing obtained ; 
 a beast killed by chance. 
 
 Ekuru^ 2. Owl. 
 
 Ekumou, 2. Stump. 
 
 Ekwende, 2. Fish tail. 
 
 Elasyi, 2. Glass. 
 
 ElarinU, 2. Length. 
 
 Elango, 2. Hoop. 
 
 Elanje, 2. Proud. 
 
 Eldgdli, 2. Sting (of bee, etc.) 
 
 Eldmhe, 2. Chat, chit-chat,' 
 con versation. 
 
 Elemba, 2. Sign, wonder. 
 
 Elernhelembe, 2. Large leaf 
 used for wrapping up food. 
 
 Elerrdjo, 2. A useless thing. 
 
 Elende, 2. Boat. 
 
 Elengele^ 2. Poor ; fool, idiot. 
 
 Elhige, 2. Poor ; fool. 
 
 Elendinla, 2. Bow (for shoot- 
 ing). 
 
 EUiu, 2. Beard. 
 
 EUnga^ 2. Gown. • 
 
 Elingalinge, 2. Corpse car- 
 ried out to burial. 
 
 EUngilio, 2. Mark. 
 
 Eliwa, 2. AVorld, universe. 
 
 Elivinli, 2. Lake. 
 
 Elivinli^ 2. Obstruction. 
 
 Elida, 2. Pond, pool, mud- 
 hole, lake. 
 
 Eloko, 2. Strong vine. 
 
 Elolo^ '2,. A fish (resembling 
 sardines). 
 
 Elondivinli, 2. Height. 
 
 Elongo, 2. Conflagration, un- 
 quenchable fire. 
 
 Elova^ 2. Seine, drag-net. 
 
 Eluini^ 2. Fame ; report. 
 
 Elumhago, 2. Bracelet, arm- 
 let. 
 
 Emama, 2. A kind of fish. 
 
 Einenld, 2. Life. 
 
 Emondo, 2. A water bird. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 13 
 
 Endege, 2. Large flat iisli. 
 Endindi, 2. Foetus of one or 
 
 two months. 
 Endondo, 2. An albino. 
 EngaTnha, 2. Demijohn. 
 Engwamha, 2. Scarcity of 
 
 meat. 
 Enjanja, 2. Brass pan. 
 Enimha, 2. Secret. 
 EnleMa, 2. Lame person ; 
 
 maimed in any part ; e. g., 
 
 the eye, leg, arm. 
 Enlingo, 2. Tide (ebb or flood). 
 Elima, 2. Badger. 
 Enlami, 2. Kich man. 
 Elime, 2. Patch. 
 Enlingo^ 2. Disease supposed 
 
 to be affected by the tide. 
 Enlomo^ 2. Dry season (ex. 
 
 middle of May to middle 
 
 of September. 
 Enungunla, 2. To open the 
 
 key. 
 Enyarogolo, 2. A kind of 
 
 bird. 
 Enyengenyenge, 2. Bustle ; 
 
 unsteadiness. 
 Epa, 2. Bone. 
 Epanga^ 2. To make. 
 Epaga, 2. Partition. 
 Epe, a. Short. 
 Epemhe^ n. Saw of the saw- 
 
 flsh. 
 Epe^ 2. Dagger (poniard). 
 EpUe, 2. Plate. 
 Epepa^ 2. Rudder ; fan. 
 Epo, 2. See Bola. 
 Epokwe^ 2. A meddler in 
 
 others' affairs. 
 Eponga, 2. Beeswax. 
 Epoge, 2. Wakefulness. 
 Epcnnba, 2. Boll ; loaf (of 
 
 food). 
 Eponga, 2. Cover. ^ 
 
 Epongo, 2. Gullet, sesophagus. 
 Epondoma, 2. Pillow. 
 Epondue., 2. Shorn head. 
 Epolcolo, 2. Hat ; small flat 
 
 basket. 
 Epoti, 2. Head, pate. 
 Epwi, 2. Stool, seat. 
 Epwi Katanga. Chair. 
 Eranga, 2. Beauty (of person). 
 Eranlia, a. Insane. 
 Eraraaa^ 2. Kind of fish. 
 ErenU, 2. Half. 
 Em'e, 2. Tree. 
 Ereria, a. Dreadful, terrible. 
 Ereihi^ 2. Axe, hatchet. 
 Eriga, 2. Hollow (in a tree), 
 Eromi^ 2. Messenger. 
 Erogora, 2. Perspiration. 
 Eroro, 2. Cob ; skin, rind. 
 Eroviarovie, 2. Nausea. 
 Erdnge, 2. Frog. 
 Erumhe, 2. Youth, period of 
 
 youth. 
 Eningu, ad. Secretly. 
 Erungu, 2. Con., maga. A 
 
 secret. 
 E^adomba, 2. Hill, elevation. 
 Esapala. A temporary house ; 
 
 booth. 
 EsdMdd^ 2. A spear with 
 
 round iron point. 
 Eseha, 2." Altar ; sacred place 
 
 where idols are kept. 
 Esekufha^ 2. Sob, sigh. 
 Esamha-tavoro. Waiter (at 
 
 table). 
 Eseku, 2. Hiccough. 
 Eserengila, 2. Tale-bearer. 
 Eshege, 2. Bags, old cloth. 
 ^S3/«Z«, 2. Tail (of bird). 
 Esyalia. Measles. 
 Esydnga, 2. Palm ; cabbage. 
 Esydnge. Hawk. 
 Esyenginla-hama, 2. Moth. 
 
14 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Esyivemhene. A larsje water- 
 bird. 
 
 Esi/ove, 2. Thirst. 
 
 jEsioagenda, 2. Bencli. 
 
 Etamhedevinla^ 2. Indecision. 
 
 Etatahaiigo, 3. One kind of 
 ant, chiefly on oninge trees. 
 
 Etabwe^ 2. Small fisli. 
 
 Etada, 2. Mat. 
 
 Etdkuma. Small f)ird. 
 
 Eteljomhe^ 2. Scorpion. 
 
 Etenlo, 2. Partition (a cross, 
 a honse) ; end of house. 
 
 Etinla, 2. • Bnttocdc. 
 
 Etuta^ 2. Switch end of cow's 
 or horse's tail. 
 
 Etomlenanga, n. Flannel 
 shirt. 
 
 Etuka^ 2. Husk or rind (of 
 plantains). 
 
 Etumb^tiumhu, 2. Part of a 
 gun. 
 
 Etumbangonja, 2. "Whirl- 
 wind. 
 
 Eca^ 2. Limb (of one's body). 
 
 Ei^a. 2. Phial. 
 
 Eoanda, 2. Tune and song. 
 
 E'vagasa, 2. Fin on the back 
 of a shai'k. 
 
 Evcmga, 2. Kind of wicker 
 basket; 
 
 Evango, 2. Harpoon, fish- 
 spear. 
 
 Evdvd. Gizzard. 
 
 Evangmili^ ad. About (in 
 point of time). 
 
 Evago. Any vessel for holding. 
 
 Evas]jU7ila^ 2. Spi'it. 
 
 Eve^ ad. Bad. 
 
 Eoemlja, 2. Violent person ; 
 courageous. 
 
 Evendinli, 2. Greatness, 
 
 Evero, 2. Place to water, 
 spring. 
 
 Eoenge, a. 2. Mane (of horse). 
 
 Evede, 2. Panting. 
 
 Evevd. Twine made of th© 
 
 plantain leaf. 
 Ecezyu, 2. Sc^ar. 
 EoeLesyi, 2. Handkerchief. 
 Ecere,^. Meat; fish. 
 EveTYiba. Strong, brave man ; 
 
 as leader, prince, warrior. 
 Evia. Good. 
 
 Evilo^ 2. Work, calling, oc- 
 cupation. 
 Evila, 2. Ebony. 
 Evindi, 2. Cloud. 
 Eviga, 2. Men. 
 Evisd, 2. War-club. 
 Emiidinla, 2. Bowsprit. 
 Edinlo^ 2. A kind of tree. 
 Evinlo, 2. A nap ; sound sleep. 
 Evora, 2. Wound, gasli. 
 Evonge^ 2. Indili'erence. 
 Ecovedove, 2. Adulteress. 
 
 Evove, 2. . 
 
 ESovo, 2. Adder, snake. 
 Evuginlia, 2. Any insect or 
 
 creeping thing. 
 Evunla, 2. A kind of fish. 
 E&undunla, 
 
 cut f lom the iron bar 
 Evundu^ 2. Piece or chunk 
 
 of flesh or fish. 
 Emmga^ 2. Epidemic. 
 EPungu, 2. Piazza. 
 Educa^ 2. Jealously. 
 Ewwrina. 2. Garment of any 
 
 kind (an old word). 
 Ewirie, 2. Dark saying; 
 
 words not commonly nnder- 
 
 stood. 
 Eioonjo^ 2. Head. 
 Etvongolo, 2. Wooden bowl; 
 
 buoy. 
 Ewogonli, 2. Wasp. 
 Ewomha, 2. Nape. 
 
 A large slug 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAKT. 
 
 15 
 
 Ewole^ 2. Generous, generos- 
 ity of mone'v. 
 
 Ewofnarungidu^ 2. A spotted 
 lizard (said to be poisonous). 
 
 Ewqga^ 2. Old sits of a town. 
 
 Ewogo, 2 {e.q^ M hora. Place. 
 
 Ewowa. Bladder. 
 
 Ewimihu, 2. Firebrand. 
 
 Ewulu, 2. Chcifi', trash, 
 
 EyainhmVm, 2. A flood. 
 
 Eyanjini, '2i. Ministration ; 
 service. 
 
 Eyare, 2. Piece, part ; small 
 quantity. 
 
 Eyenlo, 2. Mirror. 
 
 Eyakd^ 2. A kind of fetish. 
 
 Eydle^ 2. Hard, strong. 
 
 Eydnga^ 2. Drunkard, ine- 
 briate. 
 
 Eyogioe, 2. Disposition ; hab- 
 it, custom. 
 
 Eyigo^ 2. Ked-wood. 
 
 Esa, 2. A thing, 
 
 Ezanga, 2. Salt. 
 
 Ezango, 2. Book, paper ; any- 
 thing written. 
 
 Ezangangowo^ 2. Book, etc. 
 
 Ezangahobo, 2. Sole-tish. 
 
 Ezancle, 2. Int. pron. What, 
 
 why. 
 
 Ezalinla, 2 
 Ezdmba^ 2 
 
 turtle. 
 Ezdnibi, '^ 
 
 Comb. 
 
 A kind of sea- 
 
 Sist: 
 
 cousm 
 
 re lat ive too near fo marry. ~ 
 Ezcima, 2. Things any ma- 
 
 teria] thing. 
 Ezdgardo, 2. An herb. 
 Ezdnibdld, 2. Broom. 
 Ezemba, 2. War-cap. 
 EzenJi, 2. Forehead, front. 
 Ezenya, 2. Bait. 
 Ezlga^ 2. Dwelling-place. 
 Ezimla, 2. Ant-hill. 
 
 Ezyila, 2. Bunch of palm-nut. 
 
 Eziwo^ 2. Wild goat. 
 
 Ezyigo, 2. Bed-wood. 
 
 Ezo, 2. Mortar ; mill. 
 
 Ezyazya, 2. Bamboo fish- 
 spear. 
 
 Ezyenle, 2. Landing-place. 
 
 Ezlganingo, 2. Small red 
 bird. 
 
 Fala, V. t. Castaway. 
 
 Fa, ad. Away (with fala). 
 
 Fata, V. The whole body is 
 not well ; unwell. 
 
 Fatiza, V. Causing to be un- 
 well. 
 
 Fatu, n. Stockings, hose. 
 
 Fafiga, v. t. Escape, run away 
 from ; run away. 
 
 Fa, prep, or part. Without 
 position (always following 
 the noun). 
 
 Fd, ad. Again. 
 
 Fd hunda. Add more. 
 
 Fela, V. t. Put, place. 
 
 Fela^ V. t. Breathe, {feV 
 0]]wei). 
 
 Fella, V. t. Call (see Fwelia, 
 both are used). 
 
 Fey a, v. "i. Grow. 
 
 Fcva, V. i. Be or become bad ; 
 unpleasant. 
 
 Feviza, V. t. Make bad. 
 
 Fina, V. t. Fold (cloth). 
 
 Finya,fwinya, v. i. Return. 
 
 Fwiniavinlia, ad. Returning 
 the same day. 
 
 Fd or fd, prep, and ad. With- 
 out ; always follows the noun 
 it governs. 
 
 Fu/na, V. Grunt, strain ; bear 
 down. 
 
16 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Fumavuma, 
 
 V. 
 
 Grumble, 
 
 .complain. 
 Fwelict, V. t. Call (see, also, 
 
 Felia). 
 Fweia, V. t. Call. . 
 Fweyiza^ v. t. Call ; cause to 
 
 bo called. 
 Fwema, v. i. Mistake, err. 
 Fwemiza^ v. t. Cause to err ; 
 
 lead astray. 
 Fenla,.v. i. Be cooked prop- 
 erly, done. 
 Fwifii/a, V. i. Return (see 
 
 Finia and Finya. 
 Fwinizya, v. t. lietum, bring 
 
 back. 
 Fwinizya ngaka. Requite. 
 Fwiza, V. t. Turn. 
 Fwizaviza, v. Stir up. 
 
 G. 
 
 Ga, aux. V. Must ; only with 
 1st and 3d pers., but both 
 sing, and pliir. 
 
 Ga^ ad. and conj. As ; like ; 
 since. 
 
 Gambeiile, ad. conj. There- 
 fore ; then, wherefore. 
 
 Gare, and garegara, 1. Mid- 
 dle ; inside. 
 
 Gdlanli, 1. Leprosy. 
 
 Gdgwanli, 1. Go ye out. 
 
 Gchnha, 1. As {Orega) scrape 
 the cask. 
 
 (r(?, conj. Or. 
 
 Gejild, conj. Or. 
 
 Gevageva; 1. Sorrow, sadness ; 
 sullenness. 
 
 Giligili, a. and ad. True ; 
 truly. 
 
 Gilido. Flat-iron. 
 yamhi, 1. 'Anger; e. g., 
 egunlu. 
 
 One-stringed 
 
 yando, 1. Alligator. 
 
 yando, 1. A company of 
 persons sitting or standing. 
 
 yandij 1. Envy, envious. 
 
 yango^ 1. ~ Medicine. 
 
 yanja, 1. Parlor. 
 
 yomba. Hedgehog. 
 
 ydriihe. Guano 
 
 ydmhi, 1. 
 harp. 
 
 yd7ibi, n. Jibboora. 
 Gogo, ad. There. 
 Go, prep, and ad. To ; at ; 
 
 on ; in, etc. ; when ; where, 
 
 etc. 
 Gore, prep. To (used only 
 
 before persons and' pronouns 
 
 referring to persons). 
 Gore, ad. Standing ; straight. 
 Gunlu, ad. Here. 
 Gwanla. 1. Comb with its 
 
 honey. 
 Gwaruenli, 1. ■ Edge (of a 
 
 tool). 
 Gwenli, ad. Where. 
 Gwi^ ad. Where. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ihcb, 3.- Fruit of the Dika 
 tree. {Oho). 
 
 Ihandaminla, v. n. Care, 
 watchfulness. 
 
 Ibaginlo, dinga nVihaginlo. 
 To o-et by chance. 
 
 Ihamoia, v. n. Asking. 
 
 Ihanda, v. n. Sexual com- 
 merce. 
 
 Ihanga, n. Morning. 
 
 Ihangivanla, v. n. Putting 
 asunder. 
 
 Ihaku, 3. A root ; stone, etc. ; 
 used with Porno nVibahu. 
 
 Ihaka, 3. Jungle. 
 
MPOJfGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 17' 
 
 IhaTTibo, 3. Departed spirit. 
 
 Thando, 3. Adnltere.^s. 
 
 Ibdnddkd, 3. Tadpole. 
 
 Ihd,dia, v. n. Ino;ratitude. 
 
 Ihddle, pi. abddie. . An un- 
 grateful person. 
 
 Ihdnjcb, V. n. Cut, flesh 
 wound. 
 
 Ihdnja, 3. Lizai-d. 
 
 Jhdra, v. n. The act of put- 
 ting on clothes. 
 
 /hdmhu, 3. A woman taken 
 away by force with a fetish; 
 
 Ihdnla^ v. n. Decaying mat- 
 ter. 
 
 Iheha^ 3. Music-box. 
 
 Ihekelia^ v. u. Faith ; trust- 
 ing ; coniiding in. 
 
 Ihe, pi. Evdl, sin, wickedness. 
 
 Ihela, V. 11. Want, desire. 
 
 Ihmla, V. n. Boiling. 
 
 Ihenibe, 3. Pigeon, dove. 
 
 Ihenda, v. n. Anger. 
 
 Ihsria, V. n. Alleviation. 
 
 Ihenla. Planting, burying. 
 
 Iherinla, v. n. Accusation 
 (false). 
 
 Ihehu, 3. Half a round thing ; 
 semicircle. 
 
 There, 3. Malagnette paper. 
 
 ihia, V. n. Coming. 
 
 I hobo, 3. Cowardice. 
 
 I hobo, 3. Lung. . 
 
 Ibohu, 3. Presence. ^/"^ <7io' 
 iboku, he is present ; lair ; 
 place. 
 
 Iboboti, 3. Spider (insect). 
 
 Iboboboho, 3. [ Coward, cow- 
 Ohobohobo, \ ardiee. 
 
 Thogizya, v. n. Salutation. 
 
 Iboginla, v. n. Shout ; crying 
 out. 
 
 Ihoko. n. Lare-e cow or horse 
 
 fly. 
 
 Ihoha, V. n. Barking of a dog. 
 
 ( A bow and string; breathed 
 
 TTtn-frt ^ J upon near one end, and 
 
 J. uuoio, o. K struck with a short stick, 
 
 ' makes musiQ. 
 
 Ibotd, 3. Poison, witchcraft. 
 
 Ibo7igamhala, n. Small par- 
 tridge. 
 
 Iboga, 3. A bitter stick. 
 
 Ibongioa, v. n. Aniving. 
 
 Ibongunlia, v. n. Cherishing ; 
 bringing up. 
 
 Ihongo, V. n. Drunkenness. 
 
 Ibd7iga, v. n. Taking. 
 
 Ibuku, 3. Vexation ; chagrin ; 
 sensation of choking. 
 
 Ihundunla, v. n-. Mixing. 
 
 Ibunga, 3. Top-knot. 
 
 Ibundakanliu, v. n. Injur- 
 ing, destroying. 
 
 Idandunla, v. n. Redeeming, 
 redemption. 
 
 Idaga, v. n. Cry out ; scream ; 
 bleat. 
 
 Idaginla, v. n. Hope ; earnest 
 expectation. 
 
 Idagunla, v. n. Answering. 
 
 Iddmbe, 3. Sheep. 
 
 Iddnddlia, v. n. Flattery. 
 
 Idddd, 3. Drop. 
 
 Ido, 3 ; pi. ado. Rocks, stone. 
 
 Ido nyl njali, 3. Gnn-flint. 
 
 Idoniinlia, v. n. Beginning. 
 
 Ido-nyi porinlia, 3. Grind 
 and whet-stone. 
 
 Idudu, V. n. Fatigue.' 
 
 Idurinlia, v. n. Drawing to ; 
 attraction. 
 
 Ifera, 3. JSTail (of lingers). 
 (See Omera). 
 
 Ifwe. Cold. 
 
 Ifwefna. v. n. Error, mistake, 
 sin. . 
 
 Igagum.a, n. 3. Stuttering. 
 
 Igala, 3. Street (of town) ; 
 out of doors. 
 
 ( cU. 
 
 O-t-/- L ' 
 
 /ir. 
 
18 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONABY 
 
 Igelenge, 3. Bell. 
 
 Igamha, 3. A word. 
 
 Igamha mf agwanla. A mo- 
 ment. 
 
 Igamho, 3. Fine (for adultery). 
 
 Iganda, 3. Boldness, inde- 
 corum. 
 
 Iga^ 3. Woods, busli. 
 
 Iganclo, 3. Sole (of foot) ; 
 paw of dog. 
 
 Igctnja, 3. Fish. 
 
 Igddi, 3. War. 
 
 JgdldngA, 3. Sea-sickness. 
 
 Jgdma, 3. Circle ; circular 
 spot ; iirmament. 
 
 Igdntbd^ 3. Land-crab. 
 
 Igdnga.,^. Spear; with ^o in 
 honesty and truth. 
 
 Igdgwlnlo, 3 ; ex. hdgioa. A 
 place for going out. 
 
 Igega, 3. Seacrab. 
 
 Igenle, 3. Shell-iish. 
 
 Igeva, 3. ISTegro dance ; mirth ; 
 exaltation, 
 
 Igedu, 3, {igti). Bundle of 
 meat tied up in leaves, or 
 anything else. 
 
 Igenga, 3. Swarm (of bees). 
 
 Igero, 3. Part, side, division. 
 Adunga azye gw' igero zi 
 Mpongwe, are gid' igero 
 oil/ i'mimse. 
 
 Igende^ 3. Errand, messenger. 
 
 Igeveli^ 3, Sprain, strain. 
 
 Jginji, a. Awkward. 
 
 Igogo^ 3. Long coarse grass. 
 
 Igomi, 3. Ten. 
 
 Igogosijo, 3. Carpenter's plane. 
 
 Jgonlinlo, 3. Market-place. 
 
 Igonla^ 3. Stature ; height of 
 persons and things.^ 
 
 Igonlo^ 3. Top, summit, high, 
 aloft. 
 
 Igolo^ 3. Trade. 
 
 Igomhe, 3. A mat sail. 
 
 Igomhegojnhe, 3. Umbrella. 
 
 Igomhegowa^ 3. Large iish. 
 
 Iguva, 3. Bellows. 
 
 Igumha, 3. Cargo, effects. 
 
 Tgiunic, 3. Hope, expectation. 
 
 Igiiwu, 3. Pineapple. 
 
 Igurugaru, 3. Turkey. 
 
 Iguge^ 3. Door. 
 
 Igidakdha, 3. Rock-crab. 
 
 Igwanla, 3. Spittle. " 
 
 Igioera, 3. Notch, mark, hour, 
 pound. 
 
 Ijanjinla, v. n. Service. 
 
 Ijmija, v. n. Work, labor, 
 toil. 
 
 Ijaihla^ V. n. Birth, begetting. 
 
 Ijarua, v. n. Split, rcn^.. 
 
 ijdwa, V. n. Hesting. 
 
 Ijdmbwa^ v. n. Brightness. 
 
 ijdgd^ V. n. Sickness. 
 
 Ijdla^ V. n. Strength. 
 
 IJegh'ie, v. n. Shaking of the 
 hips. 
 
 Tjemha, v. n. Singing. 
 
 Ijenja^ v. n. Day-breaking. 
 
 Ijellzo^ V. n. Lnprisonment. 
 
 IjeJci'lia, V. n. Judging. 
 
 Ijeha. Easing off ; slaking. 
 
 Ijeza, V. n. Leaning upon ; 
 trusting. 
 
 Ijiga, V. n. Inheritance. 
 
 Ijivira, V. n. Believing, will- 
 ingness. 
 
 Ijinga, v. n. Healing, curing. 
 
 Ijinginla^ v. n. Entering in. 
 
 Ijordia, v. n. Filling. 
 
 Ijongmlia. liemem bering. 
 
 Ijonla, v. n. Killing, cost. 
 
 ijomha, V. n. Marriage. 
 
 Ijumbunlo, v. n. Gliding. 
 
 Ijufa^ V. n. Stealing. 
 
 Ijuioa, V. n. Death. 
 
 Ijimlo, V. n. Bereavement. 
 
MPONGWE DICTION AET. 
 
 19 
 
 Ijuwe, n. Gray hair. 
 
 Tka, 3. Meteor. 
 
 Ikarnba, v. n. Speaking, ex- 
 istence. 
 
 Uvainbinla, v. n. Speaking 
 to, or for some one ; prayer. 
 
 Ikanda, a. Acid. 
 
 Ikaga, 3 ; pi. Akaga. Leader. 
 
 Ikanga^ 3 and a. Baldness, 
 bald ; frying. 
 
 Ikanla^ 3. Miracle. 
 
 Ikanganla, v. n. "Walking 
 about. 
 
 Ikasya, 3. Bridge. 
 
 Ikataka^ 3. Bunch. 
 
 Ikazya, 3. Bed-water ; ordeal. 
 
 Ikd, 3. A knot in tying on 
 bamboo to a house. 
 
 Ikdgdrd, v, n. Snoring. 
 
 Ikdnibizo^ 3. Bersecutioii. 
 
 Ikdminla, v. n. Nailing. 
 
 Ikdndd, 3. Bunch of plan- 
 tains. 
 
 Ikdte. Question. 
 
 Ikdtd^ 3. Kind of bamboo. 
 
 Ikeva^ V. n. Conquering, ex- 
 celling, victory. 
 
 Ikenga, v. n. Heaping, pre- 
 paring. 
 
 Ikesyipk pi. and a. Want of 
 nerve ,v mercy ; merciful ; 
 tender-heartedness. (Some 
 have ekeva, and have not 
 
 Ikeso, a. ; pi. akeso. Squint- 
 eyed. 
 
 Ikendo^ 3. Fire-steel. 
 
 Ikenge, 3. Skill. 
 
 Ikeke, v. n. Cackling. 
 
 Ike. Egg. 
 
 Ikiekd, 3. Perverseness, con- 
 trariness. 
 
 Ikika, 3. Only child. 
 
 Ikika^ ad. Only, alone. 
 
 Ikilikili. Heavy tramping '•> 
 
 stamping. 
 Ikonli. Fire- wood. 
 Ikonda, 3. (See Okondo). 
 Ikomhinla. Hem, binding. 
 Ikojpa, 3. Jar. 
 Ikora^ V. n. Tying, band. 
 Ikoko, 3. Sugar-cane ; sugar. 
 Ikota, V. n. Catching. 
 Ikowa, 3. Thick lish. 
 Ikosyo, 3. Leg (of fowl and 
 
 bird). 
 Ikudukwe, e.g., neganega (ap- 
 parently an ad.) Quickly. 
 Ikiiku, 3. Sail. 
 Ikuoidu, 3. Nest (of fowl and 
 
 bird). 
 Ikunda^ v. n. xVddition. 
 Ikungula, v. n. Growling. 
 Ikulu, 3. 6^Mj' ^Kulu. An 
 
 arm cut oti. 
 Ikumhu, 3. Claw (of crab). 
 Ikutu, 3. A narrow-mouthed 
 
 basket. 
 Ikweliki, 3. Betrothment 
 
 money. 
 Ikwhityuiva, 4. A wild plum, 
 
 black ; grows in clusters, 
 Ikweta^ 3. A bend in a river ; 
 
 bay ; harbor. 
 Ilalinio, 3. Ford, crossing- 
 , place. • 
 Ilanga, 3. Lily. 
 Ilasa^ 3. Orange. 
 lldwd, 3. Fish-hook. 
 Ildndd, 3. Fresh-water crab. 
 lldtd^ 3. Mate; second in 
 
 power. 
 Ildld, 3. Pawpaw. 
 Ilende, 3. The saddle on the 
 
 roof of a house. 
 
 / A Flecper. Poisonous 
 
 TT^ T^ n ) slime from the sting of 
 
 Ilende, 6. < tlie ray-fish ; spittle or 
 
 J mucus that dries on 
 
 \ the cheek of any slime^ 
 
20 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Ileve, 3. Palm (of hand). 
 
 lliria, 3. Knot. 
 
 Iloa/iilo, 3. Dwelling place. 
 
 Ilombo. World of Spirits. 
 
 Tlosi, 3. Lime. 
 
 Tmama, v. n. Amazement ; 
 astonishment. 
 
 Jmd7idd, 3. Caterpillar. 
 
 Jnianlo, 3. Things gotten by 
 robbery ; obtained without 
 work. 
 
 Jmamisa, v. n. That which 
 causes astonishment. 
 
 JmaiTiu, 3. Dumb. 
 
 Imagl, 3. Mug ; pitcher. 
 
 Imdga^ v. n. Backbiting. 
 
 Iinhcda, 3. Hammer. 
 
 ImMngi^ 3. A head yf wheat, 
 etc. ; a long feather at a 
 cock's tail. 
 
 Imerna^ v. n. Acknowledging. 
 
 Imhugu, n. Cheek. 
 
 Itnepa^^.w. Mepejenlo. Beau- 
 ty in looking ; beautiful- 
 looking. 
 
 Imunga, 3. Loaf ; ball. 
 
 hnjpmita. Dagger. 
 
 Imtingure, 3. A fruit, grows 
 in clusters on vine. 
 
 Ina, 3. Name. 
 
 Inlanlo, 3. Bed 
 
 Inctka, V. n. Care. 
 
 Ind, 3. Tooth. 
 
 Indnyigioemljolo. Lightning. 
 
 In dd. Secret society of males. 
 
 Ingongo^ 3. Tin^any vessel . 
 of tin ; zinc, etc. 
 
 Indctun. Elastic. 
 
 Indaandua, 3 ; pi. Anduan- 
 dua. Bubble. 
 
 Ingeyd, 3 ; pi'. Angeydn. A 
 kind of trap. 
 
 Jnlinli^ 3. Liver. 
 
 Jgeidn^Z. Gin ; trap ; deadfall. 
 
 Inlipdti^ 3. Iron-pot. 
 
 Jji Um, 3 ; plu. Money ; goods 
 Tft'or ba rter). 
 
 In iro, S. IBoh dage . 
 
 Inlxanda, pi. ; Uhanda, sing. 
 Purposely; intention. 
 
 Inlanga^ 3. Moonlight. 
 
 TrddugA^. Nation; kingdom. 
 
 Inle^ coiij. Saying. 
 
 Inlinla, 3. Shadow (of per- 
 son) ; soul ; spirit. 
 
 Tningo, 3. Water ; plu. An- 
 lingo. 
 
 Inoana, 3. Debt. 
 
 Trwki, 3. Lie ; falsehood . 
 
 Intyd, 3. Eye ; grain (of com, 
 etc.) 
 
 Intya ny'' atanga. Telescope. 
 
 Intydnll, 3. Tear. 
 
 Intyime^ 3. Monkey-apple. 
 
 Inu. Fire (made for cooking) ; 
 fire-place ; stove. 
 
 Inumha, v. n. Hatred ; ani- 
 mosity. 
 
 Inyanga^ 3. Lake ; authority. 
 
 lnyanli^2>\ 'p]/AmanU. Grass. 
 
 Inyomfodo, 3 ; pi. Ainommilo. 
 Altercation ; quarrel. 
 
 Imydngi^ 3. Drunkard ; wine- 
 lubber. 
 
 Inyenli., 3. Glutton. 
 
 Inyengd, 3. Post which sup- 
 ports ridge - pole, etc., of 
 house. 
 
 Iny a^ v. n. __Foo(L 
 
 Tnye.n.a, \ ]~T\. Gain ; profit. 
 
 Inyanla^ 3 ; pi. Afrianld^T^^mi ; 
 charcoal. 
 
 pi. Afhemba. 
 
 Inyeniba, 3 ; 
 
 Poison. 
 Inyeine, 3 ; pi 
 Inyingila, 3 ; 
 
 Live- coal. 
 Inyoi, 8 ; pi. Anioi. Yoice. 
 
 Am. Foetus. 
 pi. AfuingUa 
 
/ ^- — ^jc/1 e_5 /"-'<' '^^ 
 
 Ipa ^, n. - £a,y ; wages j bire. 
 J^ia^. Flock (of birds) ; herd 
 
 (of cattle) ; shoal (of tish). 
 Ipaginla. Charge (for gnu or 
 
 , pip."); 
 Ipahiha, v. n. Beginning. 
 
 Ijpciki^ 3. Cap (for man or 
 boy). 
 
 Ijpomha. DiaiThoea. 
 
 Ipanginla. Government. 
 
 Ij)cmda {enlingo s' ajpandi). 
 The tide is running or com- 
 ing up, 
 
 Ipazanganla, v. n. Scattering. 
 
 Ipahu^ 3. Blind person ; blind ; 
 {a) blindness. 
 
 Iva,Qa. Prophecy. ■ 
 
 Ipdndia, v. n. Dissembling. 
 
 Ijpamu, 3. With^fs or tdwa^ a 
 challenge. 
 
 Ipedia, v. n. Ingult; disobe- 
 dience, 
 
 Ipesyi, 3. An affair; occnr- 
 rence. 
 
 Ip% 3. Armadillo. 
 
 tpi. Painful swelling on arms, 
 hands, or feet. '• 
 
 Tpinja, v. n. Choice ; prefer- 
 ence. 
 
 Ipivia^ V. n. Thinking. 
 
 Ipikila, V. n. Thinking. 
 
 Ipunju, Y. Brains. 
 
 Isusa {Pusyd). Accident, with 
 {nU) accidentally. 
 
 Ipote^ 3. Disease of skull. 
 
 Ira^ 3. Hip. 
 
 Irandi, 3. Oyster. 
 
 Irdga, 3. Kind of yam. 
 
 Irdrd, 3. Navel ; step (of 
 mast). 
 
 Irevo, 3. Smart ; smartness 
 (of pain). 
 
 Irende^ 3. Thorn. 
 
 Irigo, 4; pi. ^TiginV irrigo. 
 
 piCTIONAEY. 
 
 21 
 
 Make a will. Ezango z' 
 irigo. 
 
 Irinla, 3. A pod (of ground- 
 nuts). 
 
 Iroki, 3. Button, 
 
 Iroanlo, 3. A burden. 
 
 Iroiida, 3. Favorite ; one 
 loved much. 
 
 Isamba^ 3. A kind of crab. 
 
 Isavinla, v. n. Worshiping. 
 
 Isapoga, 3. A slap with open 
 hand. 
 
 Isanti, 3. Shot; ball. 
 
 Isdsdgdld. Measles. 
 
 Isdva, V. n. Sorrow. 
 
 Iscge. Entrails. 
 
 Isenda. Dizziness. 
 
 Isyangu, 5. A hankering 
 after meat. 
 
 Isydhd, 3. Crumbs of tobacco 
 left in the pipe after smok- 
 ing. 
 
 Isydld, 3. ]S^eed, care, regard, 
 respect. 
 
 Isyundd, 3. Dwarf. 
 
 Isyinga, 3. Deer-net. 
 
 Isyukd. A wife lent to a 
 guest. 
 
 Isuminlia, v. n. Praise. 
 
 Isyusya, 3. Wadding (for 
 gun). 
 
 Isyangcda, 3. Window. 
 
 Isydngd, 3. Pain of pai-turi- 
 tion. 
 
 Ita, 3. Bundle. 
 
 Itakwe, 3 ; ex. tahilia. Testi- 
 mony (mostly plural), narra- 
 tive, or things narrated. 
 
 Itataminla, v. n. Trembling. 
 
 Itanda, 3. Mangrove tree. 
 
 Itambe, 3. Paw. 
 
 Itemiza, v. n. Temptation. 
 
 Itenla, v. n. Cutting, harvest. 
 
 Itia, V. n. Fear. 
 
22 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Itita^ 3. Scratch (with finder) ; 
 
 pimples. 
 Tti mbiarimhia^ v. n. Stagger- 
 
 ing. 
 liomha, v. n. The removing. 
 Itdnda, v. ii. Love. 
 /tua {swaJca yire tua). The 
 
 knife is sharp ; edge (of tool). 
 Itu, 3. Joke, fun. 
 Itula {iremi zi re tula). The 
 
 axe is not sharp. 
 Itutii. Palm-wine. 
 Itimlia, V. n. Shortening. 
 Ivari^ 3 ; pi. amp. Bough, 
 
 limb, l)ranch. 
 Ival'wa. Scales, crumbs. 
 Ivanga, 3 ; pi. amp\ Law. 
 Ivango., 3. Reins. 
 Ivaiili, 3 ; pi. amp' . A place 
 
 where a canoe is made. 
 Iva.va, 3 ; pi. amp. Wing. 
 Ivazya^ 3 ; pi. amp. Twins 
 
 (mostly pi.) 
 Ivdhd, 3, amp\ A knot in 
 
 tree or board. 
 Ive. Wine. 
 Ivemha., 3, amp. Hole (in 
 
 ground) ; big pit, or little. 
 Ivela., pi. amp^ 3. White 
 
 plain cotton cloth ; bafts. 
 Ivenda., pi. amp*. Greatness, 
 
 government, glorv, rule. 
 Iveoenli, 3, amp\ Thigh. 
 Ivenginlo ; pi. amp-. Place 
 
 of waiting. 
 Ivenge^ 3, amp\ Corner of 
 
 cloth. 
 Jvenga., 3 ; pi. am2)\ Tune 
 
 and song. 
 Ivmli, 3 ; pi. amp''. Lat ; 
 
 mammary gland. 
 Iviri.^ 3. Shade ; Shadow 
 
 (not of a persc>n). 
 Imimhize. Kind of ants. 
 
 Ivokinlo.,^\. amp: ex. poka. 
 
 A place tliat niay be waded ; 
 
 a ford. 
 Immho, 3, amp. Boil. 
 lootTla, 3, ampofila. Men of 
 
 the same age ; generation. 
 Ivogo, 3, amp. Hole through 
 
 anything. 
 Ivuva^ 3, amp. Knee. 
 Imiva., 3. Jealousy. 
 Ivuginlo, 3, amp. Anchorage. 
 Imigiza. Stingily. 
 Iimnli. Frotli, Gcum. 
 Twanjd, 3. Young man. 
 Twdga, 3. Mourning ; wail- 
 ing (for dead). 
 Iwcild^ 3 ; pi. anib. Bamboo 
 
 swamp. 
 Iwdra., 3, amh. Pair ; suit of 
 
 clothes. 
 Iwenle. 3, avil). Breast, teat. 
 Iioola, 3, amb. A stroke ; a 
 
 charge of powder or shot. 
 Iioomhi, V. 11. Obscurely. 
 Iioomi, 3, amh. A blister. 
 Iwongo, 3. Bottom. 
 Iwugu, 3, amh. Cheek. 
 Iioumt, 3. A place of dry 
 
 soft sand. 
 Iwumn, 3. Belly, womb, etc. 
 lyela, 3. A dirt-heap. 
 lyeye, 3. Cramp; sleep (of 
 
 a limb). 
 Tyarinlo, 3. Foot-stool ; a 
 
 place often trod upon. 
 lyinginlio., 3 ; ex. jlnginla. 
 
 An entrance way. 
 lyumhunlo., 3. Hiding-place, 
 
 seci'et. 
 Izanga., 3. A place for a house ; 
 
 and the vacant place after 
 
 a house has been removed. 
 Izauzau, 3 and a. Brackish- 
 
 ness, sour. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 23 
 
 Izyacje^ 3. Duck. 
 
 Izungahanlo, 3. Chain. 
 
 Izyunga, 3. A noose ; slip- 
 knot. 
 
 Tsiiali, 3. Virgin, i-^- 'laur=> • 
 
 Isydmbunlo, 3. Hiding-place 
 for a person. 
 
 Izyeva, 3 ; pi. azy. Play. 
 
 Isyigo, 3. A tree and its 
 fruit ; a purple plum. 
 
 J. 
 
 Ja^ conj. If. 
 
 Jaga, v. t. Plaster a crack. 
 
 Jagima, v. i. To awake. 
 
 Jagunla, v..i. Creep. 
 
 Jagiayagia^ v. i. To be spread 
 abroad (as news, fame). 
 
 Jajangwe, ad. Soon, present- 
 ly ; by and by. 
 
 Jaka, V. i. Hitch ; be caught ; 
 become entangled. 
 
 Jakiza^ v. t. To cause to be 
 caught. 
 
 Jamha^ v. t. Cauterize, cor- 
 rode. 
 
 Jamhiza, v. t. To cause to 
 corrode. 
 
 Jamhtinlia, v. t. Overflow as 
 a flood. 
 
 Jaminla, v. i. Move to lee 
 side of boat. 
 
 Janga, v. t. Singe. 
 
 Janlia, v. t. Spread (as a cloth) 
 in sun. 
 
 Janja, v. t. Work, perform, 
 do. 
 
 Janjinla, v. t. Work for; 
 serve. 
 
 Janla, v. t. Beget ; bring 
 forth ; bear (fruit). 
 
 Janginlia, v. t. Melt. 
 
 Jangmlia. v. i. Float. 
 
 Java, V. t. Tread upon ; 
 trample. 
 
 Jarua, v. t. Be split. 
 
 Jarunla^ v. t. Split. 
 
 Jasa, v. i. Be tried, weary. 
 
 Jasiza, V. t. Tire, weary. 
 
 Jao, ad. Yesterday. 
 
 Jazya, v. t. To sneeze. 
 
 Javura, v. i. and a. Be or be- 
 come light ; not heavy. 
 
 Javuria, v. t. Light'en ; assist ; 
 make light of. 
 
 Jaza, V. i. Sneeze. 
 
 Jdgcl and Jd, conj. If. 
 
 (J(5t becomes J(i when it precedes a vowel 
 witu which it coalesces). 
 
 Jdgd^ V. t. Hear ; feel. 
 
 Jdgd^ V. i. Be sick. 
 
 Jdgizii, V. t. To cause sick- 
 ness. 
 
 Jdginlo, v. t. Obey ; rel. conj. 
 of^'^^«. 
 
 Jdga, v.,i. Swim. Oydgisyi, 
 swimmer. 
 
 Jdla.^ V. i. Hard ; strong ; 
 tough, etc. 
 
 Jdliza^ V. t. Harden ; strength- 
 en ; toughen, etc. 
 
 Jdlinla, v. t. To resist any 
 one. 
 
 Jdmhunla^ v. t. Sweep. 
 
 ■Jdmhua, v. i. and a. Be bright ; 
 shine. 
 
 Jdivthunlia^ v. t. Make bright. 
 
 Jdmhuiza, v. t. Brighten. 
 
 Jdnja, V. t. Nurse; cause to 
 suck, or give to drink. 
 
 Jdnla, V. i. and v. t. Laugh ; 
 laugh at, etc. 
 
 Jdnli^ ad. Day before yester- 
 day. _ 
 
 Jdwa, V. i. Kest. 
 
 Jdiounla, v. i. Pant» 
 
 Jega^ v. i. Blossom. 
 
24 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONAKY. 
 
 Jega, v. t. Get ; obtain money 
 
 or trust, 
 Jeginla, v. t. Trnst. 
 Jegeria, v. t. Stir up. 
 Jegeria, v. i. Dance ; wriggle ; 
 
 shake hips in dancing. 
 Jeha, V. i. Slacken ; abate (as 
 
 wind). 
 Jekiza, v. t. Slacken (as a 
 
 rope). 
 Jekanla^ v.- t. Mingle blood 
 
 of tribes in making treaty. 
 Jeka^ V. t. With njeka, to 
 
 make a treaty covena'iit. 
 Jela, V. i. Be in distress ; dif- 
 ficulty. 
 Jeliza, V. t. Distress ; punish. 
 Jemha, v. t. Sing. 
 Jema, v. t. Awake a person, 
 
 but the person (endngun) 
 
 awakes. 
 Jemisa, v. t. Awake ; to send, 
 
 a second ; to awake, a third 
 
 person. 
 Jenja^ v. i. Dawn. 
 Jenjiza^ v. t. Cause to dawn ; 
 
 enlighten. 
 Jenla^ v. t. See. 
 Jenla, v. t., with ntydnli. Be 
 
 ashamed. 
 Jenla^ with rjcindi. Be envious 
 
 at. 
 Jenlanla, v. i. See each other. 
 Jenliza^ v. t. Cause to see. 
 Jenla, with eheva. Pity. 
 Jezya, v. t. or v. i. To cast, as a 
 
 wave a boat ; go to leeward. 
 Jesya, v. i. Lean ; incline. 
 Jezya^ v. t. * Wag the head ; 
 
 deride. 
 Jegeria, v. t. Add firewood. 
 Jekelia, v. t. Judge persons. 
 
 (See Tenliza). 
 Jengeria, v. t. Wait for. 
 
 Jerua, v. i. To turn aside out 
 
 of the road. 
 Jiga, V. t. Choke. 
 Jig a, V. t. Inherit. 
 Jila, V. i. Decline, as day. 
 Jilanganla, v. i. Be or be- 
 come black ; dark. 
 Jilanganlia, v. t. Blacken ; 
 
 darken. 
 Jila, V. i. Incline to one side 
 
 (as a boat) ; tip ; overturn. 
 JiUzya, V. t. To destroy. 
 Jilinlo, V. t. Dream. 
 Jilinlo, V. t. {Nyilinld). To 
 
 dream a dream. 
 Jinda, v. FeUowship. 
 Jindanla, v. Be good friends, 
 
 with Jlijindanlia nli Icadie. 
 Jinga, v. t. Cure ; heal (any 
 
 disease). 
 Jinginla, v. i. Enter ; go ; 
 
 come in. 
 Jinginlia, v. t. Cause to enter. 
 Jinla, V. i. Dance. 
 Jira, V. t. Pour out ; set a 
 
 person on shore ; land. 
 Jirinla, v. i. Spill ; be poured 
 
 out. 
 Jiva, V. t. Pick (fruit) ; punch 
 
 fruit with pole. 
 Jivira, v. t. Be wilh'ng ; re- 
 ply ; believe. 
 Joha. To take back a gift. 
 Jogolia^Y. t. Disregard ; slight ; 
 
 mock. 
 Jokxoa, V. i. Rub skin off 
 
 one's self. 
 Jokunla, v. t. To be torn. 
 Jola, V. t. Make thread of the 
 
 fiber of pine-apple leaf by 
 
 scraping. 
 Jomha, V. t. Marry. 
 Jonihanla, v. i. Marry each 
 
 other; intermarry. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 25 
 
 Joma^ V. I, Be or become 
 dry ; wither. 
 
 Joinanla, v. Quarrel. 
 
 Jo7iga, V. t. Join ; unite. 
 
 JonginUa, v. t. Remember. 
 
 Jongunla, v. t. Wish for; 
 long ; lust for. 
 
 Jonla, V. t. Kill ; cost ; be 
 worth. 
 
 Jonlia, V. t. Fill. 
 
 JovXia, V. i. Fill. 
 
 Jo7'a, V. i. Be satisfied with 
 food; filled. 
 
 Joriza, v. t. Satiate ; fill ; 
 satisfy with food. 
 
 Jova, Y. t. Bail (canoe or boat). 
 
 Jovunla, V. t. Wash a thing, 
 or part of one's person. 
 
 Jdnga, v. t. Drunk, suck, 
 smoke. 
 
 Joioa, V. t. Itch. 
 
 Jufa, V. t. Steal. 
 
 Jugumia, v. i. Brood (on 
 eggs). 
 
 Jumhmila, v. t. Hide ; con- 
 ceal (a thing). 
 
 Junlo, V. t. Be bereaved ; 
 left desolate. 
 
 Juwinlo, rel. conj. But, al- 
 ways, contradicted. 
 
 Jurunla, v. t. Draw water, or 
 rum from cask. 
 
 Juwa V. i. Die. 
 
 Juwayuwa, v. i. As vessels. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kaga, v. i. Sour; spoil (as 
 food). 
 
 Kadie, 1. Man, person, any- 
 body. 
 
 Kagufna, v. i. Stutter, stam- 
 mer. 
 
 Kaka, a. Dry, low (tide). 
 
 Kakisa, v. t. Ward off (a 
 
 blow). 
 Kahwa, v. i. Fall. 
 Kakunlia^ v. t. To cause to 
 
 fall. 
 Kalua^ V. i. Change. 
 Kalunlia^ v. t. Change. 
 Kalanganlo^ v. t. To tie 
 
 {Ikalanganlo), on rafters of 
 
 house. 
 Kamha, v. t. Speak, talk. 
 Kainhinlct^ v. t. Speak to, 
 
 and for ; pray to. 
 Kaminla, v. i. Become dry. 
 Kanda^ a. Sour. 
 Kanjimla, v, t. Strain ; skim ; 
 
 sift out. 
 Kanga, v. t. Fry, parch. 
 Kanganla, v. i. Walk about ; 
 
 frequent a place. 
 Kanla, v. t. Before, advocate, 
 
 defend, favor. 
 ICanla, v. t. To relate {sin- 
 
 kanlo) ; legends. 
 liao^ conj. Except. 
 Jfapa, V. t. Threaten. 
 Kccpa, 1. (See hoU kapa). A 
 
 board. 
 Kcipa, 1. Cloth worn on 
 
 shoulders. 
 Kau7ila, . V. t. {kawunla). 
 
 Change, alter. 
 Kavalia, v. t. Roll. 
 Kawa, V. i. Fade. 
 Ifd (with poro), correl. of 
 
 vonde. Much, more. 
 Ka^ aux. v. Can ; be ; sign of 
 
 pot. mood. 
 Kdga. Launch out, or into 
 
 the water ; push. 
 Kdgdra, v. i. Snore. 
 Kdgwa^ v. i. Go out. 
 Kdgunlia, v. t. Bring ; put ; 
 
 cast out ; utter. 
 
26 
 
 MFONOVV E J > ICTION AEY. 
 
 Kdnda. 
 
 , V. t. \ 
 
 KdMld, V. Def. verb. Be 
 
 pleased ; please ; I beg you. 
 
 PL hdMloanli ; kal'dld 
 
 g'^om.pende, gw' AnyamVie. 
 Kdla, V. i. To be Bettled just 
 
 right. 
 Kako, V. t. Beget or bear a 
 
 child in one's own likeness. 
 Kdlanla, v. To resemble, 
 Kdmha, v. t. Parabolize. 
 Kdmba^ v. t. and i. Scrape ; 
 
 walk to and fro. 
 Kdmbiza, v. t. Follow, chase, 
 
 persecute. 
 Kdminla, v. t. Drive (a nail) ; 
 
 ram. 
 
 Kdndd,' to allow ; in 
 the phrase Mnd'' 
 Osaka or osyaka, to 
 f buy a slave. 
 
 Kdngdnde, conj. Because. 
 
 Kdndenle, conj. Because. 
 
 Kdnde, conj. Because. 
 
 Kdnde, 1, with nli. Contin- 
 ual. (See Idioms). 
 
 Kdnle, conj. If, though. 
 
 Kdngwa, v. i. To continue to 
 the end. Kdngwa nV ofn- 
 anto. 
 
 Kdnla., v. i. Cough. 
 
 Kdnldkd, v. n. To the end. 
 
 Kdta., V. t. Question, cate- 
 chise. 
 
 Kdte.^ 1. Question. 
 
 Kavi, 1. Back of the head. 
 
 Kdvia, V. t. To glory over ; 
 hector. 
 
 Kdva.) V. t. (hdwid). Do work 
 handsomely. 
 
 Kdzagdza, v. i. To make noise 
 against the side of a house. 
 
 Keha, V. i. Be ready ; con- 
 tain ; hold ; suffice. 
 
 Kekiza, v. t. Make ready ; 
 prepare. 
 
 I Kegwa.^ v. i. To turn round 
 I one's self. 
 
 I Kegunlia, v, t. Turn (Luke 
 I ^vi. 29). 
 
 Kela, V. i. To spoil (as old 
 cassada roots by turning to 
 wood). 
 
 Kelima., v. t. To act contrary ; 
 disregard. 
 
 Kemha, v. t. Paint. 
 
 Keniba, v. Ache. 
 
 Kendekende., ad. Quiet, mild. 
 
 Kenja, v. t. Lay up ; col- 
 lected tosrether : to arrange. 
 
 Reiija, V. i. To be near set- 
 ting (of sun). 
 
 /{era, v. t. Divide, distribute. 
 
 Keriza. To give others chop ; 
 food, etc. 
 
 Keia, V. t. Cool ; cold ; be- 
 come cold ; become stiff and 
 painful. 
 
 Keva, V. t. Conquer, sui-pass, 
 excel. 
 
 Ke, ad. Too, also. 
 
 Kegendia, v. t. Tickle. 
 
 Kegera, v. t. Nibble, gnaw, 
 grate, creak. 
 
 Kela., V. t. Mince, hash. 
 
 Kelagela, v. t. Examine, 
 search. 
 
 KUeJceU, a. Hanging by one 
 end, or side. 
 
 Kelina, v. t. Cut in straight 
 lines, or square pieces. 
 
 Kenda, v. i. Go. 
 
 Kendia, v. t. To lead. 
 
 Kendiza, v. t. To cause to 
 go ; drive ; impel. 
 
 Kenliza. Measure, try. 
 
 Kendele, v. t. Decanter. 
 
 Keg era., n. Insect that bores 
 holes. 
 
 Kmgele, ad. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 27' 
 
 Kenlia, v. t. To exclaim 
 "Ell ! " at a person. 
 
 Kenla^ v. t. liesist ; advan- 
 tages, 
 
 Eera^ v. t. Circumcise. 
 
 Kid^ ad. Entirely ; clear (used 
 with Mdgunla^ to break). 
 
 Kild {akeuga). Give a look 
 of contempt. 
 
 Kila, V. t. Anoint head of 
 thing, but not body ; smear ; 
 daub ; iron clothes ; rub. 
 
 Kincla, V. i. Arrive. 
 
 Kii'ua, V. i. To excel all 
 former doing ; condition ; 
 custom. 
 
 Kiydrnha, 1. Green parrot. 
 
 £koanga, ad. and prep. Be- 
 fore ; until ; up to. 
 
 Koga, V. i. Crow, gape. 
 
 Koginla, v. t. Snutf. 
 
 Kogova, v. t. To speak a for- 
 eign language imperfectly. 
 
 Kola, V. t. Buy, sell. 
 
 Komha, V. t. Fence. 
 
 Koinba, v, t. Dodge. 
 
 Eombinla, v. t. Hera ; sur- 
 round ; flow round, as a 
 river. 
 
 ^ [In the phrase, c janja 
 
 Mcindanll. ) kandain when a slave 
 
 77-. , . •< works for a third per- 
 
 Ji.a7haani. \ son and his master 
 
 ( takes his wages. 
 
 Kongcu, 1 ; pi. ITconga. A 
 
 reed. See Ogonga. 
 Kora, V. t. Tie up into a 
 
 bundle. 
 Korowa, 1. A crown. 
 Kota, V. t. Catch, 
 Kotiza, V. t. Understand. 
 Kova, V. t. Get. 
 Kova, V. Use illustration ; 
 
 make a supposition. 
 Koza^ V. t. To rub against 
 
 one. 
 
 Kumanlia, v. t. 
 
 Kiihu, ad. At anchor. 
 Kubunla, v. t. Dip up (as 
 
 water). 
 Kuga, V. i. Deprived ; or 
 
 friends bereaved ; dithcultj ; 
 
 distress, etc. 
 Kulembenli, 1 {Nkulenibenli). 
 
 Mangrove-seed. 
 Ktimanla, v. i. Stand up. 
 Kumha, v. i. To carry a load 
 
 of something. 
 Kuminlia, v. t. Collect ; gath- 
 er together. 
 Kwnanla, v. i. iiise up ; 
 
 stand up, 
 
 Straii^htcu ; lift 
 up one fallen. 
 Make strai^'ht, 
 ( e.g., a road. 
 
 Kumba, v. t. Carry on back; 
 shoulder. 
 
 Kiiinba, 1. Dam (across a 
 water-course). 
 
 Kumbisa, v. Keep off (nau- 
 tical). 
 
 Kunde, 1. Remainder, when 
 part has been paid (in trade). 
 
 Kunda, V. t. Add ; increase ; 
 give more. 
 
 Kunda, v. t. To avenge. 
 
 Kungula, V. i. Growl ; roar ; 
 rumble (as tiger, lion, etc.); 
 distant -thunder. 
 
 Kundinla, v. t. Heap up ; 
 preserve. 
 
 Kuria, V, t. As one's racing- 
 horse. 
 
 Kutye, 1. Paywe, fetish. 
 
 Kwa, V. i. Fall. 
 
 Kwa^ V. i. Faint. 
 
 Kwa, V. t. To reap ; cut plan- 
 tations. 
 
 Kwandaininla, v. i. Pounce. 
 
 Kwada, v. t. To snap a gun. 
 
 Kwanga. Event up to a given 
 time or place. 
 
28 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY, 
 
 Kwanle^ 1 ( Uhwanle). Wild 
 lieu, or grouse. 
 
 Kwenla, v. i. Embark ; to go 
 iuto. 
 
 Kwenla, (inkdld). Get upon 
 the knees ; beg ; implore. 
 
 ICwe, ad. Little. (Suffixed to 
 adjectives, it forms compara- 
 tives). 
 
 KweJcwe, ad. Enough ; prop- 
 erly. 
 
 Ifwera, v. t. Cut a gash in 
 anything ; bleed. 
 
 Kwh'Q,, V. t. Rob; plunder. 
 
 Kw?za, V. t. Cause to fall ; 
 offend. 
 
 Kioezanganla, v. i. Agree. 
 
 Kwer' adnngu. To cause quar- 
 reling. 
 
 Kwera, v. i. Wink (with the 
 eyo). • 
 
 Kw3vifno, ad. Afterward ; 
 soon ; immediately. 
 
 M. 
 
 Mama, v. i. Be amazed ; 
 wonder. 
 
 Mande, int. pro. Who. ■ 
 
 Mania, v. i. Be completed ; 
 finished. 
 
 Mango, 1. Swiftness; run- 
 ning (with nli). 
 
 Manja, 1. The relationship 
 of the same husband of the 
 head wife to the other wives. 
 
 Manga, 1. Manatus, sea-cow. 
 
 Manga, 1. Treaty made by 
 mixing blood. 
 
 Manji, 1. .Maid. 
 
 Maketa, 1. Ginger. 
 
 Mdga, v. t. Slander ; l)elittle ; 
 backbite. 
 
 Mdga, v. i.{erungu). Whisper. 
 
 Mdgwa, v. i. Break (as a stick, 
 pole, etc.) 
 
 Mdgunla, v. t. Break. 
 
 Mdngi or Mongi, 1. People. 
 
 Mdnld, 1. Large yam. 
 
 Mdndi, 1. Large black mon- 
 key. 
 
 Mdri, num. a. One. 
 
 Md/ri, a. pron. Otlier. 
 
 Mha, 1. Corn : maize. 
 
 Mhadi, 1. Squirrel. 
 
 Mhalo, 1. A relative on the 
 mother's side. 
 
 MhaMe, 1. Forehead; skull. 
 
 Mhojmbi, 1. Gourd. 
 
 M~bamha, 1. Great grand- 
 child ; niece ; nephew ; child 
 of a slave. 
 
 Mhamta, 1. Genealogy ; gen- 
 eration. 
 
 Mhanli, num. ad. Two. 
 
 Mbao. Violence. 
 
 3fhato, 1. Miser ; stingy per- 
 son of money. 
 
 Mhata, 1. Stool. 
 
 Mhanli, 1. Day after to-mor- 
 row. 
 
 Mhawasya, 1. A wart. 
 
 MhAgd, i. Fishing-ground. 
 
 Mhdii, 1 {inbdvu). Pus, the 
 collect in the corner of the 
 eye. 
 
 Mhdnginli, 1, hdnga. Man- 
 ner of taking. 
 
 Mhanginlo, 1, hdnga. Man- 
 ner of being taken. 
 
 Mhela, 1, in phrase {jivelia 
 Tcadie mhela), when h is at, 
 ad is tune. 
 
 Mhe, conj. Or. Mhe, — rnhe 
 — whether — or. 
 
 Mhe^ a. Bad ; ugly ; disagree- 
 able. 
 
 M heli. War expedition ; army. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 29 
 
 Mhelehe, 1, and a. Discord; 
 quarrelsome. 
 
 Mhenda^ 1. Ground nut ; pea- 
 •nut. 
 
 Mhei. Piece ; part. 
 
 Mbenjo, 1. Thwart (of boat 
 or canoe). 
 
 31 heyile, 1 . Spring ; fountain. 
 
 Mhezyo, a. Raw ; uncooked ; 
 green ; not dry. 
 
 Mhhni. In the right. 
 
 Mheli^ 1. Army ; host. 
 
 Mhere, 1. Herring (fish). 
 
 Mheve^ a. Level ; fiat. 
 
 Mhia, a. Good ; pretty ; agree- 
 able. 
 
 MMamMe, ad. Well; satis- 
 factory. 
 
 Ifhiago, V. i. Belch. 
 
 Mitnii^ 1. Satiety. 
 
 Ml)iba^ 1. Palm-nut. 
 
 Mblnde, 1. Wild goat. 
 
 Mhinda. Menses. 
 
 Jfhinla, 1. Louse. 
 
 Mlnpa, 1. Stripe ; welt (from 
 whipping). 
 
 Mhinji, 1. Wild dog ; jackal. 
 
 Mhoa. Dog. 
 
 Mhogo, 1. "Mouthfid. 
 
 MhoJhO, 1. Squirrel. 
 
 Mhoni, 1, mhonli. Goat. 
 
 Mhora^ 1. Place. 
 
 Mholo, a. Old ; applied only 
 to persons and animals. 
 
 Mljolo^ pi. mholoanli, i. v. 
 The word of salutation. 
 
 3fhongwe, 1. Yam. 
 
 Mhongd^ 1. Bribe. 
 
 Mhufna^ 1. Egg-plant; to- 
 mato. 
 
 3fhuniba, 1. Rainbow. 
 
 Ifhungu, 1. Toothache. 
 
 Mhunlinli, 1 ; hunla. Abun- 
 dance. 
 
 Mhioegezi^ 1. Turtle. 
 Mhundahi, \. Carelessness; 
 
 wastefulness. 
 Mhute, 1. Bottle. 
 Mhuve, 1. A tribe. 
 Mhusya. Fish-net. 
 Mhwedi, 1. Captive ; prisoner. 
 Menda^ 1. Hatchet. 
 Menga^ 1. Pigeon./ 
 Ifeza, V. t. Dash (water) down 
 
 or upon. 
 Mezwe., a. Left-handed. 
 Mengo^ 1. Horn. 
 
 iTliat same ; emphatic. Suffixed to 
 pronouns, self to adjective lorms 
 tlie superlative decree ; prefixed 
 to adjective-prououiis, that very 
 same. 
 
 Mega, v. i. Doze ; nod ; slum- 
 lier. 
 
 MeMlla, v. t. Accede ; agree. 
 
 3£ende, a. Flexible ; elastic. 
 
 MenU, ad. To-morrow. 
 
 Mefna, v. t. Confess ; ac- 
 knowledge. 
 
 Mena, v. t. Become accus- 
 tomed to a place or thing. 
 
 llenliza, v. t. Finish ; com- 
 plete ; end. 
 
 Meng'' auldngd, 1. Wild 
 pigeon. 
 
 Menla, v. t. Swallow. 
 
 Mengele, 1. W ater - snail ; 
 screw: 
 
 Mepa, V. i. Be or become 
 good ; pretty ; pleasing. 
 
 Mepia, v. t. ' Make good ; 
 pretty ; sanctify. 
 
 Mepanla, v. i. Be good for 
 each other ; fit ; suit. 
 
 3fevdnld, ad. There. 
 
 Mi, pers. pron., 1 st sin. 2£ie, I. 
 
 Mia, V. t. Know. 
 
 Mia, a. What number; how 
 many. 
 
 Mieza, pro. To make known. 
 
30 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 3£ienU, 1. Manner of know- 
 ing ; knowledge. 
 
 Minla, v. t. To not answer. 
 
 Mo, a. One ; the same. 
 
 Monda, 1. Amulet; charm; 
 fetish. 
 
 Mondd, 1. Plan for doing 
 anything. 
 
 Mondo, 1. Snare ; trap. 
 
 Mdnya if atanga. Sweet- 
 potato. 
 
 Mpago, 1. Tribute; custom; 
 duties on goods. 
 
 Mpaga, 1. Boubt, with dova. 
 
 Mpandinlo,!. Ladder; stairs. 
 
 Mpanlo, 1. Adze. 
 
 Mpanli, 1.' Fashion ; custom ; 
 
 . action ; deed. 
 
 Mpanga, 1. Spur. 
 
 Mpanga, 1. Yoke. 
 
 Mpanginli, 1. Manner of 
 doing; character; nature. 
 
 Mpava, 1. Whip; stick for 
 whipping. 
 
 Mpdndd, 1. Hoof. 
 
 Mpdngd, 1. Joint. 
 
 Mpdngd, 1. Thing ; matter ; 
 aifair ; difficulty. 
 
 Mpdnld, 1. Road ; path ; way. 
 
 Mpdwgdy y' saon. Something 
 being spoken. 
 
 Mpdga, 1. Lock. 
 
 Mpd, mpd TWO, ad. Together. 
 
 Mpe, a. Short. 
 
 Mpemha, L Chalk, flour, 
 bread. 
 
 Mpenju, 1. Cockroach. 
 
 Mpenli. A gift. 
 
 Mpendinli, 1. Size, greatness. 
 
 Mpc'zyu, 1. A burnt place ; 
 house ; farm, etc. 
 
 MxMd., 1. Blemish. 
 
 Mpesyinla. Manner of weigh- 
 ins:. 
 
 Mpira, 1. The second plan- 
 tain of a field. The first is 
 Okengo. 
 
 Mpira, 1. Gunpowder, shoot, 
 pot-black. * 
 
 Mpira yi tendinla. Ink. 
 
 Mpiri^ Y. Darkness. 
 
 Ifpio, 1. Hotness, heat. 
 
 Mpivinla, 1. Thought. 
 
 Mpo, adv. Afloat ; moving on 
 the ground in water. 
 
 Mpoge, a. Deaf. 
 
 Alpogo, 1. Mouse, 
 
 Mpolo^ a. Large. 
 
 Mponja^ a. Solid ; not hollow. 
 
 Mponde^ 1. The wild fig-tree 
 of several species. 
 
 Mpongwe, 1. Wisdom, pre- 
 cocity. 
 
 Mpongtoe^l. Tribe of people, 
 and language. 
 
 Mpoma^ 1. A head-tide. 
 
 Mpovo, 1. A fish-spear. 
 
 2£punji, 1. Tusk of ivory 
 weighing above twenty 
 pounds ; ivory. 
 
 Mpundu, 1. Billet of wood 
 (as ebony, red-wood, fire- 
 wood). 
 
 Ifpungu, 1. Palaver. 
 
 Ilpusyu, a. {pmjnizyu). Wide. 
 
 Muzunla, v. t. Crumble ; 
 shell off (as corn). 
 
 Mwera, v. t. Scratch. 
 
 Mwetinla, v. t. Motion to ; 
 wink at ; nudge ; jog. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nago, 1. House. 
 
 Nla% number, ad. Pom'. 
 
 Naka^ v. t. Care ; want ; care 
 for. 
 
 NaiTiha, v. t. Cook (by boil- 
 ing). 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAKY. 
 
 31 
 
 Nanla, v. i. Lie down. 
 
 Nanl ^antydvinld, v. t. Sleep, 
 
 Nanda^ 1. Mile. 
 
 J^anlo, 1. Spittle, drive. 
 
 N<^ga, 1. Dirt, dirty. 
 
 Nanga^ 1. Dry s-easou of Jan- 
 nary and February. 
 
 Naga^ v. i. Rain. 
 
 Nagiza^ v. t. Cause to rain. 
 
 JSFdganla, v. i. Pass by. 
 
 N^dnld, ad. So. 
 
 Wdntye, 1. Eoom (in a house). 
 
 Ndzya^ v. t. Pass, hand. 
 
 Ndzinla^ r. t. Pass, baud to. 
 
 Ndngioa^ v. i. To arise. 
 
 JSfdngunlia. To cause to aiise. 
 
 Ndd^ a. Lon^, tall. 
 
 Ndago. A fragrant medicinal 
 plant. 
 
 Ndaga, 1. Thing. 
 
 Ndaginla, 1. Desire. 
 
 Mdatizo, 1. Seam in a gar- 
 ment. 
 
 Ndako^ 1. Brother ; ^cousin ; 
 relative too near to marry. 
 
 Wdavinli, 1. Length, distance. 
 
 jNdd, compound ex. ; nli, d, 
 prep, and pron. by the, after 
 pass. verb. 
 
 JVdego, 1. Friend. 
 
 JVdare. Hold here ; hand here. 
 
 JV^de, compound ex. nle ye or e 
 prep, and pron., by him, after 
 pass. verb. 
 
 jydele, n. Soft, weak. 
 
 JV^dege, 1. Division ; knot or 
 joint of plantains, etc. 
 
 Ndelce^ 1. Deck of ship ; story 
 of house ; floor of planks. 
 
 JSfdigo, 1. Date tree and fruit. 
 
 Wdo^ conj. But. 
 
 Ndoanlinli^ 1. Being, exist- 
 ence, living. 
 
 Ndova, 1. Enemy {mbe). 
 
 Ndolo^ 1. Scar. 
 Ndoiidai, a. High. 
 Ndondo, 1. Albino. 
 Ndaa, 1. The month atter 
 
 child-birth. 
 Wdumhaga, 1. Sudden fear; 
 
 fri.ght. 
 Negira, v. t. Beg. 
 JVega, v. i. To haste. 
 Negcunega^ ad. Soon ; quickly ; 
 
 in a hurry. 
 Wegiza, V. t. Hasten. 
 JVeiTia^ V. t. Weed; cut off 
 
 or up by roots, weeds, gifass, 
 
 etc. 
 Nhnba^ v. t. Coax ; entice ; 
 
 allure ; wheedle ;' flatter in 
 
 order to obtain a favor. 
 Nemenlia^ v. i. Limp ; be 
 
 lame ; make lame. 
 Nengenha, v. t. Show ; point 
 
 out. 
 N'enga, v. t. Learn. 
 Nenja^ v. t. Teach. 
 Nenge^ 1. Island. 
 Nera^ v. t. Lick. 
 Ngalca^ 1. Ant-nest ; mush- 
 room-shaped ; earth-made. 
 yandi. Envy, covetousness. 
 N'ganli, a. Another's; not 
 
 one's own. 
 yando, 1. An assembly of 
 
 people. 
 ydmbi, 1. Harp of many 
 
 strings. 
 JSfgd, int. Lideed ? ah ! 
 NgdXa, 1. Whirlpool. 
 Ngdldngdld, ad. with ponla. 
 
 Intently. 
 Ngdwe^ 1. Captain (of a ves- 
 sel). 
 Ngdwd. Hook. 
 Jygdnle, 1. Hoarseness, husM- 
 
 ness. 
 
32 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONAET. 
 
 Ngdi^ 1 . A piece of cloth for 
 wearing. 
 
 Nijdi-hoto^ 1. Coat. 
 
 Ngai-y'okanda, 1. Pants. 
 
 Ngai sydtu, 1. Shirt. 
 
 Ngdndd, 1. Gourd. 
 
 Wgdri, 1. ]S"ape of the neck. 
 
 Ngdve-dosyi, 1. Snnff-box. 
 
 Ngeva, a. Bow-legged. 
 
 J^go^ 1. Mamma. 
 
 JVgosi/u, a. Obstinate ; cruel, 
 (opposite of ilcesyi). 
 
 Ngozyo, 1. Parrot. 
 
 Ngoa, 1. Hog. 
 
 Ngunge^ 1. Owl. 
 
 Nguva^ 1. Porpoise. 
 
 Ngiiwa, 1. Siiield. 
 
 Ngidv^ 1. Strength, power, 
 ability. 
 
 Nguwu, 1. Hippopotamus. 
 
 Ngioa^ a. Shut ; not open ; 
 closed. 
 
 Ngwangndndd^ 1. Trumpet- 
 bird. 
 
 Ngwasyi, ad. Fast (in the 
 hand). 
 
 Ngwanydrdi^ 1. Eagle. 
 
 NgioWgdi, 1. Wife's mother. 
 
 iV^t«^, 1. Mother. 
 
 Ngwesyindja^ 1. Sensitive- 
 plant. 
 
 Ngwentyontyo, 1. Hop, hop- 
 ping. 
 
 Niga, V, t. Abuse, curse. 
 
 Nige-nlwndi. Repent, regret. 
 
 Nimba, v. t. Hide ; conceal ; 
 * keep secret. 
 
 NiiUa^ V. t. Extinguish (a 
 candle). 
 
 Niminla^ v. t. Refuse to give. 
 
 Niffiianla^ v. t., rel. conj. of 
 nifhinla. 
 
 ^imhanla, v. i. Be hid. 
 
 Nmitty v. i. Dive, sink. 
 
 Nindia, v. i. To start ; jump 
 with fright. 
 
 Ningo, 1. Rain. 
 
 Niti, a. Strong; fiery J^like 
 pepper) ; proof rum, etc. 
 
 Niva, V. t. Own. 
 
 jSfjalie, 1. First-born. 
 
 Njalie, 1. Post supporting 
 the ridge-pole in a house. 
 
 Njali, 1. Gun. 
 
 Njali-tova. Thunder. 
 
 Njanla^ 1. Hunger. 
 
 Njanlo, 1. Birth. 
 
 NjasyinXi^ 1. Weariness. 
 
 jSfjave. Leaf of a tree. 
 
 Njaiue, 1. Fruit (wild, whose 
 seed yield oil for food). 
 
 N^jd^dnli, 1. Fowl, chicken. 
 
 J^jdgu, 1. Elephant. 
 
 Njdla, 1. Fiddle-string. 
 
 Njdlihe, 1. A kind of snake 
 which lives in salt water. 
 
 N^jdmhwe, a. Bright, shining. 
 
 Njega, 1. Leopard. 
 
 Njeka^ 1. A covenant. 
 
 Njenge, 1. Ant. 
 
 Njenlo^ 1. View, prospect. 
 
 Njembe, 1. Female secret so- 
 ciety. 
 
 Njegelu, 1. Chin ; lower-jaw. 
 
 JVjeve, 1. Ripe plantain. 
 
 Njelcnjele, a. Glistering, as 
 sun. 
 
 Wjele, 1. Knife-blade. 
 
 Njiko^ 1. A khid of bird 
 which lives in rivers. 
 
 Njinla, 1. A monster monk- 
 ey, larger than a man. 
 
 Njiwo. A kind of musk-deer. 
 
 Wjuhe, 1. Trouble ; vexation. 
 
 I^juwlnli^l^ex.juwa. Man- 
 ner of dying ; death. 
 
 Nlcaga^ 1. 
 jyjcambi, 1. 
 
 Armadillo. 
 A deer. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAKY. 
 
 33 
 
 NTtago, 1 . A kind of monkey. 
 NJcamhinli, 1. Manner of 
 speaking; dialect; language. 
 Nkala^ 1. Town ; a cotfin. 
 Pain. 
 Hundred. 
 Scale (of lish). 
 Sickness, 
 (with nil). Pur- 
 
 Nkazya^ 1. 
 jSfJmma., 1. 
 Nkazyo, 1. 
 *Nhanli^ 1. 
 Nhanda^ 1 
 
 posely. 
 Nlcango, 1. 
 
 fume. 
 Nhavala, 1 
 Nhavi, 1. 
 Nhamh'i^ 1 
 
 Fragrance ; per- 
 
 Horse. 
 Paddle ; oar. 
 (pi. IJcamhi). A 
 
 —-kind of deer. 
 
 NUO/Yilo^ 1. A legend ; story. 
 
 Nhagazga^ 1. Elbow. 
 
 Nhagii. Cane; staff. 
 
 NMnde, 1. Perseverance ; 
 continual exercise. 
 
 Nhdndd, 1. Company of per- 
 sons traveling. 
 
 NMngchild, 1. Millipede. 
 
 Nhdngdnld^ 1, Wind-pipe. 
 
 Nhdnjd^ 1. Bat. 
 
 Nhdnje^ 1. Shark. 
 
 Nkdla^ 1. A kind of shell. 
 
 UMla, 1. Clock ; watch. 
 
 JSfJculd, 1. Petition ; desire ; 
 prayer. 
 
 Nhdmbd, 1 . • A spiked pani- 
 cle, like wheat. 
 
 ]}^kd)ni, 1. Seaward ; south- 
 ward. 
 
 J^kdnge, 1. Concubine ; an- 
 other's wife kept. 
 
 jV^ke:Jd, 1. Wise ; sober ; 
 thoughtful ; wide awake. 
 
 JVkei, a. Cold ; damp. 
 
 JVkele, 1. Barren female ; land. 
 
 Nhegioinli^ 1, Qy..hgwa. Turn- 
 ing : manner of turninff. 
 
 Jykeva, 1. Gum ; copal. 
 
 Nkenjo., 1. Gizzard. 
 
 Nkels 1. A skull. 
 
 Nkegere, 1. Any creaking 
 sound, as rudder, etc. 
 
 Nkende,, 1. Fool ; raca 
 (Matt. V. 22). 
 
 NWcgenli^ 1. Spark (of fire). 
 
 Nkhna, 1. Monkey. 
 
 N^keffia-yimpindd, 1. Large, 
 black monkey. 
 
 Nkema-yinddva. Large, yel- 
 low monkey. 
 
 Nkema-y'' osyoke, 1. White- 
 nosed monkey. 
 
 JVkemhd, 1. A suit of fine 
 clothes. 
 
 Nkhnbe^ 1. "A cat-fish. 
 
 Nkengd^ 1. Kindness. 
 
 Nkenjo, 1. Dwarf. 
 
 Nkc'Te. Nice ; clean ; partic- 
 ular ; pure ; holy. 
 
 Nkilinga, 1. Yery small 
 monkey. 
 
 Nkima^ 1. Boiled plantains 
 mashed. 
 
 Nkizyi^ 1. Fragment ; small 
 piece of anything. 
 
 Nkinda^ 1. Departed spirit, 
 i.g.^ Onyamhe and Ihanibo. 
 
 Nkinji, 1. Collection. 
 
 Wkoga, 1. Crown-bird. 
 
 Nkogo^-\. Supposition ; illus- 
 tration ; figure of speech ; 
 proverb ; law. 
 
 Nkolo, 1. Evening; P.M.; 
 near sun-set. 
 
 Nkonla^ 1. Of one ageSj a 
 contemporary. 
 
 JS^kdmhd (pi. Ikcwiba), 1. A 
 cross-street. 
 
 JSfkofna, 1, with doanla. To 
 be angry with one anotl^er. 
 
 jS'kombe, 1. Sun ; calico ; 
 eloth. 
 
34 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 N komhenlongo, L Raven. 
 
 Nhomhe-mjondo^ 1. IS'oou ; 
 twelve o'clock. 
 
 Nhoiiibetenliafenlia. Two- 
 headed snake. 
 
 Nhonde^ 1. Head-wife. 
 
 NJcogora, 1. Wliip-snake. 
 
 Nhondi^ 1, in jDhrase nlige 
 nkondi g^ osaun. Repent 
 of a thing. 
 
 J^konga, 1. Copper ; chiefly, 
 copper-rod. 
 
 Nhongo^ 1. Cat-fish. 
 
 Nkoro^ 1. Centipede. 
 
 Nkova^ 1. Direction ; course. 
 
 Novo, 1. Scab ; an eye-lid. 
 
 Nkida,!. Arotindmit; knob. 
 
 JSfkuvia, 1. Shell. 
 
 JSkumha, 1. Dam. 
 
 {A dam to keep off wa- 
 ter from a fish-hole 
 while a woman bales 
 it and catches the 
 fish. 
 
 Nkuiiiba, 1. Company (of 
 persons) ; a party of persons. 
 
 Nkunlu, 1. Sea-turtle. 
 
 Nkundu, 1. Fetish-house. 
 
 Nkuvu^- 1. Large mat made 
 of flags. 
 
 N kwdld,\. Carelessness, waste- 
 fulness. Plenty, abundance 
 of food {yasinya). 
 
 Nkwere, 1. Grating of teeth ; 
 ex. nkwegere. 
 
 Nla, conj. and prep. And, 
 
 with, by, etc., used with 
 
 sab. verb. pas. and neg., viz : 
 
 %?^ docmla azyele, etc., and 
 
 denotes possession. 
 
 Nle, prep. By ; used with the 
 passive voice of verbs. 
 
 Nld, conj. Neither, nor. 
 
 Nlenld, ad. To-day. 
 
 Nlengenlenge, ad. Midnight. 
 
 Nli.) prep. With, denoting ac- 
 
 companiment. Before words 
 beginning with r and w it 
 changes to nla. 
 
 Nlofne,?i. ipnlome). Male. 
 
 Noa, V. t. Fight, war. 
 
 Noanla, v. t. "Wear (clothes). 
 
 Noana, v. t. To owe. 
 
 Hoga, V. t. Build (house). 
 
 Noginla, v. t. Net, braid, 
 plat. 
 
 JSfoka, V. t. Lie, deceive. 
 
 Nokinia, v. t. Lie to, or for, 
 a person ; deceive. 
 
 Noma, V. t. Bite, sting. 
 
 Nomha, 1. Hill, mountain. 
 
 Nonga, a. First. 
 
 Nonle, a. Bitter. 
 
 Nonda, 1. Flower (general 
 name). 
 
 Nongo, 1. A very thorny tree, 
 leaves like the butternut. 
 
 Ndngwa, v. i. Arise, awake. 
 
 Ndngunlia, v. t. Lift up ; 
 straighten up. 
 
 iV^/(», ad. As. 
 
 Ntanibi, 1. Property ; riches ; 
 goods of all kind. 
 
 N tango, 1. Number. 
 
 Ntavanga. Early raoi-ning. 
 
 Niare^ i. e. nte are. As it is. 
 
 Ntain, 1. Witness. 
 
 Ntaga. The same. 
 
 Ntango, 1. Number, account. 
 
 Ntdndi, or ntondi, 1. A lover 
 {ntdndi y^anUva). 
 
 Ntdndinla, or ntondinla, 1. 
 Will, pleasure. 
 
 Ntdsen, 1. Thousand (En- 
 glish). 
 
 Nte, ad. As, like. 
 
 Ntevo, ad. Empty, only, sole- 
 ly, desolate. 
 
 Nte we, 1. Rafter made of a 
 bamboo. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 35 
 
 Ntinla, 1. Butt-end ; cause, 
 reason, purpose. 
 
 Ntimhi^ 1. Plank, board. 
 
 Ntomha, 1. Sand-bar, shallow. 
 
 Ntomho^ 1. ISTeedle. 
 
 Ntomho yi hotinla^ 1. Pin. 
 
 JSftogolo, 1. Pepper (red). 
 
 Ntonda^ 1. Current of a river, 
 etc. 
 
 JSftongo, 1. Stick, drum-stick, 
 cane. 
 
 Mori, 1. Eat. 
 
 Ntonlo, 1. Breast ; bosom of 
 pei'soii, or garment. 
 
 Ntuenli, 1. A sharp edge. 
 
 Ntugu, 1. . Hip. 
 
 Ntiilungu^ 1. Corner, angle. 
 
 JS'tuma, 1. Fork (for eat- 
 ing). 
 
 J^tumhu, 1. Heel. 
 
 Ntumba, 1. Contention, light- 
 ing. 
 
 Ntuazange, ad. Perad venture. 
 
 Ntunlu, 1. Whole, entire. 
 Owenja wantunUb, whole 
 day. Phrase, Anymnhie a 
 zye nVovia wantuntu : God 
 is no respecter of persons. 
 
 Ntyaga, 1. Garden, farm. 
 
 Ntyamhi, 1. Harp of live 
 strings. 
 
 Ntyanga, 1. A flag, 'ensign. 
 
 Ntyango, 1. Noavs. 
 
 Ntyale, 1. Custom, fashion. 
 
 Ntyago, 1. Feast. 
 
 Ntyande, 1. Two and a half 
 fathoms, cloth. 
 
 Ntyavu, 1. Soap. 
 
 Ntyava, 1. Vine, hoop. 
 
 Ntyangilia. Rapidly and 
 loudly spaaking. 
 
 x^tyango. Distance. 
 
 Ntyanja, 1, Rain season. 
 
 Myai, 1. End. 
 
 Ntyai nli ntinla. From the 
 beginning to end. 
 
 Ntya, conj. Either. Ntya- 
 ntyd. Lithe*^ or, 
 
 Ntyage, 1, witli hwa. Quarrel, 
 palaver. 
 
 Ntya, prep. Between. 
 
 Ntyamhd, 1. A loan to be re- 
 paid in kind. 
 
 Niydli, 1. Small bird. 
 
 NtydngaJzanlo, 1. Joint. 
 
 Ntydnliy 1, Shame. 
 
 Ntyangim, 1. Excuse. 
 
 Ntydmhi, 1. Plum. 
 
 Ntydme, 1. Hand. 
 
 Ntydmhe, 1. Marrow. 
 
 Ntydria. Secretly. Prov. i. 18. 
 
 Ntyeri, 1. Gazelle. 
 
 Ntyendd, &,. Awry; crooked; 
 out of square. 
 
 J^tye, 1. Earth, vi^orld, coun- 
 try, land. 
 
 Ntyhnhd, 1. Censure, blame. 
 
 JSftyenge, 1. Wash-basin, cup, 
 bowl. 
 
 JSftyenge, 1. Sand. 
 
 Ntyege, 1. Short-tail monkey. 
 
 Ntyelele, 1. White ant. 
 
 Ntyere, 1. Ramrod. 
 
 Ntyemhd, 1. Blame, rejaroach. 
 
 Ntyigo, 1. Chimpanzee. 
 
 Ntyinla, 1. Blood. 
 
 Ntyinli, 1. House-fly. 
 
 Ntyuanli-])dti, 1. Iron pot. 
 
 Ntyua-yogo, 1. A native pot. 
 
 Ntyolomho, 1. Brass kettle, 
 
 Ntyolo, 1. Hammei", anvil. • 
 
 Ntyovi, 1. Bamboo-nut. 
 
 Ntyonda, 1. Pudenda, 
 
 Ntyondo, 1. Heart. 
 
 Ntyonde, 1. Head of naviga- 
 tion. 
 
 Ntyongi. The lead of a lead- 
 line ; a Britannia cup. 
 
36 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Ntyonjo^ 1. Leech. 
 
 Ntyozyo^ 1. Foot. 
 
 Ntyozyo-y'' -atanga. Shoe, boot. 
 
 Ntyogo, 1. Fetter. 
 
 Ntyoro^ 1. Loop. 
 
 Wtydnge, 1. A play and the 
 board for the game. 
 
 Ntyanga^ 1. IS^ail for fasten- 
 ing and naihng. 
 
 Ntybnga^ ovntydnga, \. Quar- 
 ter, part of town. 
 
 Ntyxigu^ 1. Day. 
 
 Ntyuga^ 1. Jug. 
 
 Ntyunla, 1. A deer-fly. 
 
 Ntytiva^ 1. Open sea. 
 
 Ntyunlu, 1. Driver-ant. 
 
 Ntyxirnbu^ L A kind of tree. 
 
 Ntyume. Large iish, 
 
 N'uanla, v. t. Owe. 
 
 Wuga, V. t. Kow, paddle. 
 
 Ntiginlia^ v. t. To incite. 
 
 Nximhu^ \ . Bow of boat, etc. ; 
 boat ; canoe. 
 
 N^umbinli, 1. Hatred. 
 
 Numha, V. t. Hate. 
 
 Nunla^ V. i. To smell. 
 
 Nunliza^ v. t. Cans, of nunla. 
 
 Nunja, V. t. Shut. 
 
 NuiiduvHe^ 1 
 herb ; mint. 
 
 Nunga^ v. t. Light (a candle). 
 
 Wungu^ a. Old (of things). 
 
 Nungunla^ v. t. Help, open (a 
 door). 
 
 Nungwch^ V. t. Be opened. 
 
 Nimgunla, ex. nungunla ir. 
 Help each other. 
 
 JSfungwanla, (as keys). To 
 open each other. 
 
 Nuwunla^ a. Last ; ex. 
 numounla. 
 
 Nya^ a. {pwcnja nya). Day, 
 opening. 
 
 JVya, V. t. Eat. 
 
 A fragrant 
 
 Nyalunla. An orphan still an 
 infant, and nursed by an- 
 other. 
 
 Nyango^ a. Small. 
 
 Nyamhie, a. Yain, useless 
 
 Nyavali, 1. Arm-pit. 
 
 Nyare, 1. Cow, bull (wild or 
 tame). 
 
 Wyama, 1. Wild beast. 
 
 Nyanga^ 1. Rust, salt-water. 
 
 Nyawe^2iA. No. NymoegeimA 
 nyawedu. "No, cii-ee." 
 
 Nyawhiyawe^ 1. Nothing, no. 
 
 Nyange^ 1. White crane. 
 
 Nyanto, a. (as nyama). Fe- 
 male. 
 
 Nyazyi, 1. Sneezing. (See 
 jazya). 
 
 Wydnda, 1. Whale, onion. 
 
 Nydnla^ L. New. 
 
 Wydnli, 1. Bird. 
 
 Nydnyua, v. i. To be straight ; 
 to be stretched out. 
 
 Nydnyunla^w X. To stretch out. 
 
 Nyembi, 1. Dancer, singer. 
 
 Nyenge^ a. Many, plenty. 
 
 Nyenlie, 1. Brass (metal). 
 
 Nye (same as nya), v. t. Eat. 
 
 Nyezya^ v. t. Feed, jDardon. 
 
 Nyena, v. t. Gain, profit (by 
 trade). 
 
 Nyezya, v. t. Rule ; govern ; 
 lit., cause to eat. 
 
 Nyenya^ v. t. Sprinkle, scat- 
 ter, sow. 
 
 Nyenga, v. i. Tremble, quiver. 
 
 Nyenle, a. Another. 
 
 Nyeivdj^ a. Some. 
 
 NyilOy 1. Anchor. 
 
 Nyilinlo, 1. Dream. 
 
 Nyinya^ v. Urinate. 
 
 Nyowe, 1. Honey-bee. 
 
 Nyongo, 1. Steward (bond or 
 free). 
 
Ot'"'' 
 
 'f 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONAKT. 
 
 37 
 
 Nyomjiia, v. Be straight. 
 Nydnyunlia, v. t. Straighten. 
 Nyovo, 1. An instrument to 
 
 bail a canoe. 
 Nyuma , I . Back (of the body) . 
 Nyonge {nydnge)^ 1. Thready 
 Nynngd {nydngd), 1. Time ; 
 
 as, 1 saw him three times. 
 Nydngdle, 1. Noise, racket. 
 Nybnla (or nydnla), 1. Ant. 
 
 O. 
 
 also 
 
 0, pers. pron. Thou, 
 rel. pron., who. 
 
 wag:eB . 
 
 OS^a^ 4 (odika). Nut-tree. 
 
 Ohaki, 4. Bamboo-pith basket. 
 
 Ohalmgd, 4. Harlot. 
 
 Oherinla. Accuser. 
 
 Oheli. Sickly person ; sickness. 
 
 Oho, Y. Iron bar. 
 
 Oboiohoio, 5. A coward. 
 
 Ohota, 4. Female that has 
 produced. 
 
 Ohu^ 4. Streak, stripe. 
 
 Ohulungu, 4. Cavern. 
 
 Ohumhulu, 4c. An open court 
 with houses on three sides. 
 
 Ohwe {obue), 4. Light, open, 
 unobstructed. 
 
 Odando^ 4 and a. Pride, proud 
 man ; proud. 
 
 Odd, 4. Silence. 
 
 Odede, 4. Yalley. 
 
 Omdembe, 4. Calm. 
 
 OdiTca, 4. A kind of condi- 
 ment prepared from a nut. 
 
 Odo, 6. Bed. 
 
 Odokebole, 4. Striker ; vicious 
 pei'son. 
 
 Ododo^ 4. Scale, balances, steel- 
 yards. 
 
 Odolongo (used with go). On 
 the under-side ; under. 
 
 Odovalova., 4. Enemy, cen- 
 surer. 
 
 Odominlia, 4. Beginner (of 
 a thing). 
 
 Odufna., 4. Cannon. 
 
 Oduma, 4. Snake. 
 
 Odusyd, 4. Ignorant person. 
 
 Oduere^ 4. Contentment. 
 
 Of a, 4. Fish-bone. 
 
 Ofalifa, 4. Thorny plant ; 
 thistle. 
 
 Ofafa^ a. Brittle. 
 
 Ofe, 4. Thief. 
 
 OfeUiza. Deteriorator. 
 
 Ofuru., 4. A small fly ; sand- 
 fly ; gnat. 
 
 Oga, 5. K ing ; head man of a 
 town. ^- 
 
 Ogakisi, 4, hahiza. Defender. 
 
 (jgdlanga7ilo, 7. Ite tied on 
 the rafters to support the 
 thatch. 
 
 Ogamhwe, 6. Orator ; spokes- 
 man. 
 
 Ogamhagambo, n. Palaver ; 
 dispute ; noise. 
 
 Ogo.nganlo, 4. Companion ; 
 neighbor. 
 
 Oganji^ 4. Yein ; tendon. 
 
 Ogande, 7.. A wash or bathing- 
 place. 
 
 Ogandaga, 4. Health ; healthy 
 person. 
 
 Oganla, 7. Statue ; jdol . 
 
 UQanda, 5. Doctor ; conjuror 
 prophet. 
 
 Oganjo, 4. Switch end of an 
 elephant's tail. 
 
 Ogara^ a. Condemned ; cast 
 (in a trial). 
 
 Ogaza. Juice of ripe plan- 
 tains. 
 
 S^/ 
 
38 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Ogazagaza. Strong, healthy 
 
 person. 
 Ogasyo^ 4. Greediness ; greedy 
 
 (of meat or money). 
 Ogavalia, 4. Ravine. 
 OgA, 6. Arm. 
 Ogd, 6. Handle (of jng). 
 Ogd')nba,7. Path beyond but 
 
 near a town. 
 Ogdli, 4. Eope ; cord ; vine. 
 Ogdi, 5. Mother, father, 
 
 brother, or sister-in-law. 
 Ogdndd. A row ; quarrel. 
 Ogdndisi, Kdnda. Mild word 
 
 for slave. 
 OgrlngPj 7. Eyelash. 
 Ogdnld, 4. An elephant-trnnk. 
 
 {Onldnld). 
 Ogdgwo {Kdgiixi). A going 
 
 out. 
 Ogemhia. Pain. (See Kemba). 
 Oge ; pi. 8ihe^ 1. A fainting. 
 Ogembd. Handsome article 
 
 of dress or furniture. 
 Ogenge, 4. A pod (of pepper). 
 Ogengende^ 4. Bad-disposi- 
 
 tioned person ; foolish. 
 Ogera^ 5, a. Lazy. 
 Ogela, 4. Crack ; split. 
 Ogele,?i,. Stingy; op. Ogwande 
 
 (of food). 
 Ogenda^ 5. Guest; stranger. 
 Ogengilia^ 5. Copper-colored 
 
 man ; white man. 
 Ogendd, 7. Journey. 
 Ogendagendo. Journeying ; 
 
 a wanderer. 
 Ogengenli^ 4. Star. 
 Ogengd, 7. Lower-jaw. 
 Ogenle^ 4. Flea. 
 Ogege^ 4. Plover. 
 Ogiligili, 4. Tinithf ulness ; 
 
 justice. 
 Ogo, 4, ex. Ogovo. A piece or 
 
 bolt of cloth, usually 14 or 
 18 yards. 
 
 Ogola^ 4. Intestinal worm. 
 Ogu-ola. 
 
 Ogoto, 6. Leg. 
 
 Ogolongozyo. A cross, thus : 
 X , a man^s "mark." 
 
 Ogolo nja {agolonja). Astride. 
 
 Ogomha^ 7. P^'ence. 
 
 Ogorn^e, 4. Crocodile. 
 
 Ogonli, 7. Fire and iirewood. 
 
 Ogombinlo, 4. Hem. 
 
 Ogonga, 7. Boil. 
 
 Ogonlo, 4. Calling ; duty ; 
 employment. 
 
 Ogove. 4. Apangwe knife. 
 
 Ogowa, 4. Boil ; kind of tree. 
 
 Ogoro, 4. A band ; a chord, etc. 
 
 Ogore, 6. Equity ; upright- 
 ness ; upright. 
 
 Ogozyi. Shouting (of " E ") 
 at top of voice. 
 
 Ogu^ 4. A worm ; maggot. 
 
 Ogu^ 4. Sense; gumption; 
 the mind. 
 
 Ogula, 4. Tornado. 
 
 Ogxila^ 4. Tree, which bears 
 NJcula nuts. 
 
 Ogulu, 4. !Roj)e ; cable. 
 
 Oguina, 4. Cassada. 
 
 Ogunle, 4. Eyebrow. 
 
 Ogumguva, 6. Blacksmith. 
 
 OguMia, 4. Mast. 
 
 OgimibanyoJisa, 4. A tree re- 
 sembling a hazel tree. 
 
 Ogumhu, 4. Strap for holding 
 anything on the back ; sus- 
 pender. 
 
 Ogwanla^ 6. Mouth. 
 
 Ogwande^ 6. Generous ; lib- 
 eral ; op. ogele. 
 
 Ogwera, 6. JSTight. 
 
 Ogwera-nlengenlenge. Mid- 
 night. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAET. 
 
 39 
 
 OgwUi, 6. Moon. 
 Ogtcere, 4. Sole-fisli. 
 Ogwirinla, 1. Back-yard. 
 Ojanli^ 4. Farewell {tiginla 
 
 ojanli). 
 Ojo, 4. A native candle ; 
 
 torch. 
 Okaii^a, 4. A tent (house). 
 Okanla. Advocate, defender. 
 Ohamhi^ 4. A speaker in a 
 
 palaver ; preacher. 
 
 (Used only in impera- 
 tive second per. in 
 Btarting for some 
 place, or to in- 
 crease the speed 
 I of a person, . hois 
 I doing eometliing. 
 
 Ohao^ 4. Boundary, division- 
 line. 
 
 Okapo, 4. Leanness. 
 
 Ol-asonguwu, 4. A raw-hide. 
 
 Okclclu, 4. Weariness, e.- g., 
 of sea ; of one kind of 
 food. 
 
 Olmngdnde. Because (of time 
 long past). 
 
 OMndd, 4. Cotton. 
 
 OJcdngd, 4. Spine. 
 
 Ohdngdld, 4. Keel (of boat). 
 
 Oheva, 4. Wave. 
 
 Okeli, 4. Skill, cunning, sa- 
 gacity, discretion, careful- 
 ness, watchfulness, guard ; 
 gof oheli, be on your guard 
 against. 
 
 OTcenja, 4. Green snake. 
 
 Ohendehende, 4. Quietness, 
 humility, quiet person, etc. 
 
 OheU (hakele), 5. Man or 
 woman. 
 
 Okelakela, 4. Brightness (as 
 of sun), 
 
 Olrngele. Being up at night. 
 
 Ohengo, 4. The first planting, 
 or ear. of com, of a field. 
 
 OkengeJcenge, 5. Carpenter. 
 
 OMVingdi^ 4. To iron shirts, 
 or any cJothes. 
 
 OJcita, 6. liesidence far from 
 home ; to trade. 
 
 Ohokotwe^ 7. Bed-bug. 
 
 Okolongo, 4. Daad standing 
 tree. 
 
 Okondo, 4. Heap, pile. 
 
 Okongolia, 4. Something re- 
 sembling sugar-cane. 
 
 Okoiribanddndd^ 4. The cres- 
 cent over which the hair is 
 braided. 
 
 Okorwe^ 4. Binding (of a gar- 
 ment). 
 
 Okugi, 4. A person bereaved 
 of all friends. 
 
 Okmoa^ 4. Body. 
 
 Okukwe, 4. A person dressed 
 hideously in disguise. 
 
 Okunie, 4. The tree of which 
 canoe boats are made. 
 
 Okwara, 4. Cutlass, matchet. 
 
 Okwara vfiwdra. Sword. 
 
 Okioende, 4. Tail. 
 
 Okwenla, 4. Inside (of boat, 
 etc.) 
 
 Olako. A place of temporary 
 residence. 
 
 Oldgd. A kind of devil. 
 
 Olald, 4. Pawpaw tree. 
 
 Olddinli, 4; Spy. (Gen. xlii. 
 
 Oldgdzyonge^ 4. Fire-fly. 
 
 Oldvi^ 4. River. 
 
 Olamho^ 4. India-rubber. 
 
 Onlamhanli, 4. Dozen. 
 
 Olasa, 4. Orange-tree. 
 
 Olanda^ 4. Dutch knife. 
 
 Olandunli, 4 ; ex. dandunla. 
 Kedemption-money. 
 
 Olanga, 4, a. Calling, or shout- 
 ing at the top of the voice ; 
 elephant's voice. 
 
40 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Olatanlo^ 4. Assembly, audi- 
 ence. 
 
 Oldnga^ 4. Valley. 
 
 Olemha, 4. Herd, flock. 
 
 Onlmge, 4. Aim (with a gun). 
 
 Olega, 4. Biscuit. 
 
 Olemhianlo, 4. Race ; trial of 
 swiftness. 
 
 OUve, n. Hankering after 
 food. 
 
 Olendd, 4. Abscess (in the 
 groin). 
 
 Olele. Tender. 
 
 OUngo, 4. A space of time. 
 
 OUrio, 7 ; ex. diria. Honor. 
 
 Olomha. Interior-ward. 
 
 Olomho, 4. A brass kettle. 
 
 Olonda, 4. Bead, seed, nut. 
 
 Olonda^ 4. Flower. 
 
 Olongo^ 4. ISTeptune ; a large, 
 flat brass pan. 
 
 Olonga^ 4. Ring, armlet, ank- 
 let. 
 
 Olosi, 4. Lime-tree ; citrus 
 raedica. 
 
 Oloso^ 4. A sore. 
 
 Olovalovi, 4. Enemy. 
 
 Oluhu^ 4. Honor, reverence. 
 
 Olunda. Generously. 
 
 Oluo, 4. Witness ; one pres- 
 ent. 
 
 Onlumbxv^ 4. Lip testimony. 
 
 Om edu. Any one. 
 
 Oma, pi. anlaga. Person, pi. 
 people (man or woman). 
 
 Omhago, 4. Sawflsh, 
 
 Ohaka^ 4. Bamboo ; pith-bas- 
 ket ; its capacity, one bushel. 
 
 Onibdma, 4. Boa-constrictor. 
 
 Omhdga^ 4. Hoe, pick-axe, 
 mattock. 
 
 07nbdga, 5 (awdga). Strangei", 
 foreigner, alien. 
 
 Ombdnla, 4. Mud, 
 
 OrnMgd, 4. Temporary en- 
 campment for fishing and 
 drying fish. 
 
 Omhenla^ 4. Hunter, fisher- 
 man. 
 
 Omhenle, 4. Goora-nut. 
 
 Ombiagwarda, 4. Hypocrite. 
 
 Omhilo, 4. A strong Eian ; 
 worker. 
 
 Omhonlo, 4. Snot. 
 
 Omhu^ 4. Ashes (used only in- 
 sing.) 
 
 Omhutowa. Fog, mist. (Gen. 
 ii. 6). 
 
 Omhnouiu. Dust. 
 
 Oi7d)U7^awure. Rily, or muddy 
 (as water). 
 
 Omhwiri. A kind of bush, 
 and sea-devil. 
 
 Omenlo^ 4. Finger. 
 
 Ofnengo^ 4. A single plantain. 
 
 Omepinlo^ ex. mepianla. 
 Favor. 
 
 Omia, 4. Fur, wool. 
 
 Omienle^ 4. Pure. Mpongwe, 
 ex. mie nle. I say. 
 
 Omoro w' oro'§i, 4. Earring. 
 
 Omosyo. Idleness. 
 
 Ompango^ 4. A vine, or braid- 
 ed isyonlo, for putting 
 around a tree and one's 
 body to assist in climbing. 
 
 Oinpanganlo, 4. Promise. 
 
 Ompaho. Bamboo thatch. 
 
 Ompingci, 4. Ball. 
 
 Ompindi^ 4. Farm, plantation. 
 
 Omp)ogonli, 4. Hole, lair. 
 
 Ompendi. l^eg from- knee to 
 ankle. 
 
 Ompege^ 4. Cheese. 
 
 Ompomhanla, 4. Doorway. 
 
 Ompomho, 4. Nose. 
 
 Ompomo, 4. Point (of land). 
 
 Ompdi. Large fish. 
 
MPONGWE DICnONAEY. 
 
 41 
 
 Ompa/nie. Irony. Rekadie 
 •ar' omp\ ironical. 
 
 Om/pemhe, 4. Dew. 
 
 Ompenle, 4. Poisonous snake ; 
 viper ; cerastes. 
 
 OmjMnle, 4. Handle (of any- 
 thing). 
 
 Ompunga, 4. Wind. 
 
 Ompunga wi nkdmi. Sea 
 breeze. 
 
 Ompunga w" olorriba. East 
 breeze. 
 
 Ompunga wi holo. Land 
 breeze. 
 
 Ompunla, 4. Stench, scent. 
 
 Ompuzyu^ a. Wide. 
 
 Ompondo^ 4. Bachelor. 
 
 OmpeU, 4. Neck. 
 
 Ompei {pineid^ ompeyi). The 
 little linger; are nV omj)eyi, 
 he has the nose-bleed. 
 
 Ompufha^ 4. Year. 
 
 Ompwenla, 4: ] ex. poa. Low- 
 ness of tide at new and full 
 moon. 
 
 Oinanda, 4. Day. 
 
 Oma/nga^ 4. Kidney. 
 
 Omanga)Tianga, 4. Testicle. 
 
 Omdri, 5, a pron. Other 
 (article to be supplied). 
 
 Offianga., 5 {atanga). Cocoa- 
 nut. 
 
 Omondo^ 4. Limit, end. 
 
 Ona, 4. Loins. 
 
 Onldmhe, 5. Black man ; ne- 
 gro.^ 
 
 Onlerd, 5. Grown person. 
 
 Onembd, 4. Flattery. (See 
 nemba): 
 
 One, 4. A remainder ; some- 
 thing more ; the last of any 
 number {o7ie wHgomi)', the 
 tenth. 
 
 Ongonga, 4. Throat. 
 
 Onddngd, 4. An ulcer. 
 
 Oywanjayit^nja, 4 {onia). 
 Koof. 
 
 ^?^^^7^, s. and p. 4. Depemli nt ; 
 ward ; disciple. ..-a^ 
 
 Ondanda, 4. Colic. 
 
 OnjePnjHe, 4. Brightness, 
 effulgence. 
 
 Onlive, 4. Slave ; mild word 
 for slave. 
 
 Onlemhe, 4. Honey. 
 
 Onldngd, .5. Kind, {onldngd 
 nde) ; what kind ? 
 
 Onleirie., 4. Tongue. 
 
 Onayi, 4. Poison for arrows, 
 etc. 'Pangwe, onei. 
 
 Onlenji, 4. Teacher. 
 
 Onlaga, 4. Help ; servant ; 
 mild word for slave. 
 
 Onlag ''onlagie, 5. Wise man. 
 
 Onligi. Sweet; sweetness of 
 taste ; for smell, mhia. 
 
 Onlamba, 4. Cloth. 
 
 Onldnld, 4. An elephant's 
 trunk. 
 
 Onlogisyi, 4. Builder. 
 
 Onlold, 4. A liar. 
 
 Onlome, 5. Man, husband. 
 
 Onldngd, 4. Kind. 
 
 Onlumbu, 4. The lip ; testi- 
 mony ; assertion ; report, 
 etc. ; nipple. 
 
 Onongd, 4. Zeal ; ardent de- 
 sire ; propensity. 
 
 Ontinti, a. Tepid. 
 
 Onyamhe, 4. A disembodied 
 spirit. 
 
 Onyao, 4 {onyawo). A young- 
 er child. {Ntydria aye 
 onyao wi' ndinga, is young- 
 er than Ndinga). 
 
 Onyale, 4. Tree, without 
 owner, proprietor ; used 
 with toa, e. g., anto w' atuenP 
 
i2 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 onyale ; akandq^ m^ atuenV 
 
 onyale. 
 Onyemhmiyemba, 5. Enemy, 
 
 witch-poison, adulterated. 
 Onyale, 4. Alugu ma'' sovio 
 
 anlingo, rum is adulterated ; 
 
 alugu ni' atuerili onyale, be- 
 cause of putting many water 
 
 in it. 
 Onyenge, 4. Mist. 
 Onyena. 
 Omamha, 4 ; pi. imamnba. A 
 
 snake, 
 Oijwanga, 4 {imia). Iron. 
 Oywanla 5. Child. 
 Oytvanto, 5 ; pi. anto. (A 
 
 woman ?) a girl. 
 Oywdngwe, 5. A brother. 
 Oytoembd, 4. Soup, gravy. 
 Oywei 4 {imieyi). Breath; 
 
 heat of sun. 
 Oyvjangala^ 5. A small snake. 
 OpaMlia, 4. Beginner (of a 
 
 talk). 
 Opanga, 4. Made, make. 
 Opepe, 4. Plantain-set. 
 Opodunla, 4. To break a 
 
 house. 
 Opmnbolo, 4. Tree resembling 
 
 a chestnut tree. 
 Orala, 4. A frame over a 
 
 place for drying fish and 
 
 things. 
 Orango, 4. Oath. 
 Oralo, 4. Clay floor. 
 Oramba, 4. Root. 
 Ordi, 4. Ground, soil, clay. 
 Ordwo, 4; ex. tdwa. Curse, 
 
 abuse. 
 Orega, 4. Cask, barrel. 
 Orendisi, 4. One causing ano- 
 ther to write {iidinga). 
 Orendi, 4. One writing, a 
 
 waiter {ndinga). 
 
 Orendd, 4. Mark, letter. 
 
 Oreru, 4. Deer-horn, trumpet. 
 
 Orevunlo, 4. Reproof, in- 
 struction, coi'rection. 
 
 Orefna wi mpyio. Covetous- 
 ness. 
 
 Orema, 4. Heart. 
 
 Oreti, 4. Right, righteousness. 
 
 Origo, 4. An heir ; inheritor, 
 successor to king. 
 
 Orogo, 4. Rogue. 
 
 Orondo, 4. A young, unfold- 
 ed leaf. 
 
 Orbnge. Depth. 
 
 Orogosaniba, 4. Morning- 
 gown, cloak. 
 
 Orole, 4. An awl. 
 
 0}'oi, 6. Ear. 
 
 Oronglnlo, 4. Grave. 
 
 Oronga, only in sing. Mush- 
 room. 
 
 Orongimlio, 4. Resurrection. 
 
 Orowa, 4 Heaven. 
 
 Orove, 7. Prairie. 
 
 Ordmhd, or ordmM, 4. Trump- 
 et, bugle-horn, etc. 
 
 Orondd, or ordndd, 4. Eaves- 
 bearer, ridge-pole. 
 
 Oronga, or ordngd, 4. Chan- 
 nel, deep, depths. 
 
 Ordngd, or ordngd, 4. Sprout, 
 blade. 
 
 Orugo, 4. A brace. 
 
 Orunda, 4. Tabooed ; sacred. 
 
 Orue, 7. Hair. 
 
 Oruvisi. A false accuser. 
 
 Osaun, 4. Thing, affair. 
 
 Osahampazyo, 4. Grass-hop- 
 per. 
 
 Osenja, 1. Saturated with 
 salt. Ntyuanla y' atuenV 
 osenja, the pot of food is too 
 salt. 
 
 Oae^fl'i: 4- Lizard. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY, 
 
 4:3 
 
 Osege, 4. Eiitrail, bowel 
 
 (mostly pi.) 
 Osasa, 4. Brass rod, used her e 
 _in_trade. 
 Osi/aka, 5. Slave; the price 
 
 of a slave. 
 
 Osyange, 4. Pea, bean. 
 Osyehianli, 5. Bushman. 
 Osydliwiengele. Blue 
 ocean).. 
 
 Perseverance. 
 Interrupter, 
 
 OsydUnla. 
 Osydkdlia. 
 noyance. 
 Osyenibe, 4. 
 Osyingi, 4. 
 
 (of 
 
 an- 
 
 A trench. 
 A wild animal, 
 size of a cat ; predatory. 
 
 Ososyi, 4. Whistlino;. 
 
 Osyuka, 4. A dish of pound- 
 ed plantains, ground-nuts, 
 etc. 
 
 Otale, 4. A place, rack, or 
 frame to keep chests on. 
 
 Otanganli, 4. White man. 
 'Vtdki, 4.~ Cock's tairfeathm*. 
 
 Ote, 1. Bamboo lath. 
 
 Otemu, 4. Stupid, dull, fool- 
 ish person ; greenhorn, 
 
 Othnhe, 4. Pawn (not a per- 
 son). 
 
 Otete^ ad. Thin (not thick). 
 
 Otika. A wife, or near friend 
 of one dead ; widow, heir, 
 etc. 
 
 Otiketike / pi. iti. Fool, idiot, 
 stupid. 
 
 Otoanla. Bearer. 
 
 Otowdo, 4. Basket (made of 
 African rattan). 
 
 Otowgo, 4. A corn-stalk. 
 
 Otdndd^ 4. Hair-pin of ivory, 
 wood, iron, brass, etc. 
 
 Otdngu, 4. Gun-barrel. 
 
 Otu, 4. Joke (mostly pi.) 
 
 Otuniba, 4. Belt, girdle. 
 
 Otutu, 4. Smoke. 
 
 Omhutova^ 4. Fog. 
 
 Ovango. Some thing (as 
 poison). 
 
 Ovamho, 1. Bark of a tree 
 used in building houses' . 
 
 Ovamba, 4. Freckle. 
 
 Ovamie, 4. Flame, blaze (of 
 fire). 
 
 Ovago. An exclamation of 
 surprise ; a meeting place. 
 
 Ovangi, 4. Maker. 
 
 Ovdvi, 4. Mediator ; for mes- 
 senger, igend-e. 
 
 Ovega, 1. Shoulder. 
 
 Ovela, 7. A concealed pit for 
 catching wild animals. 
 
 OveQuhi, 5 (hemba). Spy. 
 
 Ovengevhige, 4. Smile. 
 
 Oviro ; pi. oviruanli, def. v. 
 Let us go ; come on, 
 
 Ovdvi, a. Lustful, 
 
 Ovonlo, 6, Skill, cunning, 
 artifice (mostly in pi.) 
 
 Odatnbo, 4. Jib-sail. 
 
 Ovanja, 7. Side (of per- 
 son). 
 
 Odenda, 7 {w'^itena). Scissors, 
 shears. 
 
 Ovenda, 7 {uHsenglnla). Ra- 
 zor. 
 
 Ofnanda^ 4. L)ay, in opposi- 
 tion to night. 
 
 Owaro, 6. Canoe. 
 
 Owatanga^ 6. Vessel ; white 
 man's canoe. 
 
 Owaro-tutii^ 6. Smoke-canoe ; 
 steam-boat. 
 
 Omanto, 5. Woman, wife ; 
 pi. rnito. 
 
 Omanto-tigo. A widow. 
 
 Omanio-tika. A widow. 
 
 Ovanga, 7. Daybreak. 
 
 Owavi, 7. Leaf ; pi. ijavi. 
 
u 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 OLodngd, 4. Herb (Geii. ix. 
 
 22) ; a growing crop. 
 Owenja, 6. Daj^, the time it 
 
 is light. 
 Owenja-nya. The beginning 
 
 of day. 
 Owenja-sya. The close o± 
 
 day. 
 Owera, Y ; pi. fera. Finger- 
 nail, etc. 
 Oweld, 4. Paint. 
 Ovjoiisi^ 4. Striker, fighter. 
 OwonliawonUa, 4. The crown 
 
 of the head. 
 Owonda^ 4. Limit, border. 
 OwonliawonUa^ 7 ; pi. ihonlia- 
 
 wonlia. A butterfly. 
 Owowa, 7; pi., ihowa. A 
 
 feather. 
 Owdngd., 4. Plant, seed. 
 Oydgisyi {jdga). A swimmer. 
 Oyanli, 4. Pruitful person. 
 Oyanj)^ 4. | {janja). A 
 Oywnjisyi, 4. j worker. 
 Oyemho, 7. Ballad, song, 
 
 hymn. 
 
 /I . . , ) A person who 
 Oyeqtsyi, 4. f , ^ , -, 
 
 n • T A r trnsts a cred- 
 OyeginU, 4. j .^^^,^ 
 
 Oyinlo, 4. Dancing. 
 
 Oyigo^ 4:{j{ga). Inheritance ; 
 property left to be inherited. 
 
 Oyingo, 4. Red-wood tree. 
 
 Oyila, 6 ; pi. amb. Palm-nut 
 tree. 
 
 Oyilisi. Destroyer. 
 
 Oyonlisi, 4. Hunter, fisher- 
 man. 
 
 Oyombo, 4. Polygamist. 
 
 Oydngaydngo. Beverage. 
 
 Oyuwe^ 7. G-ray hair. 
 
 Ozaia, 4. Nap of cotton cloth ; 
 in pi. fring3. 
 
 Ozamha, 4. Side, part, self. 
 
 Ozanja, 4. Eel, bustle. 
 
 Ozange, 4. Light. 
 
 Ozaviiilo, 4. Blessing ; spec, 
 that conveyed by puiiibulia. 
 
 Ozd7nhi, 4. Parent, ancestor. 
 
 Ozyd, or ozyo, 4. Pipe ; 
 tobacco pipe. 
 
 Ozdzi, 4. Pestle. 
 
 Ozindi, 4. Comforter. 
 
 Ozira, 4. The side of a house. 
 
 Oziina, 4. Gravity, serious- 
 ness ; opposite of orogo. 
 
 Ozowa, 4. Venereal disease. 
 
 Ozindio, 4. Comforter, con- 
 solation. 
 
 Ozombio, 4 {zomhia). Com- 
 mandment. 
 
 OzyahiUa, 7. Kindler; small 
 tire- wood. 
 
 Ozydngd, 4. Arrow. 
 
 Ozydgunla, 4. JSTostril. 
 
 Ozydzyd, 4. Affair, business, 
 palaver. 
 
 Ozymdo, 4. Pay, wages, hire. 
 
 Ozyenld^ 4. A wooden wedge. 
 
 Ozyeve, 4. Spoon. 
 
 Ozyege, 4. Beach. 
 
 Ozyivo, 4. Whipping. 
 
 6^si/o, 4. Face. 
 
 Ozyonlo, 4. Wooden spear. 
 
 Ozyonle, 4. Flesh, meat. 
 
 Ozyonlo, 7. African rattan. 
 
 Ozyoto, 4. Funnel made of 
 leaves. 
 
 Ozydnga, 4. Mouth of pig, 
 dog, etc. 
 
 Ozymiginlo, 4. Salvation. 
 
 Ozuminlio, 4. Praising. 
 
 Ozyunge, 4. Saviour. 
 
 OzyuTnba, 4. Beak of bird. 
 
 Ozyungahanlo, 4. Chain. 
 
 Ozyume, 7. A name of woman. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 45 
 
 P. 
 
 Pa^ Y. t. Give. 
 
 Pa^ ad. Not. 
 
 Pa. Denoting completed ac- 
 tion. 
 
 Paga, v. i. Be, or become 
 rich ; well supplied. 
 
 Pagia, v. t ; caus. of jpaga. 
 Enrich. 
 
 Pago^2i. Coarse. 
 
 Paginla, v. t. Charge (a gun) ; 
 till a pipe. 
 
 Pahilia, v.. t. Begin. 
 
 Pakunla^ v. t. Peel (with 
 fingers). 
 
 PaTcioa, v. i. To break off, or 
 come off in pieces. 
 
 Pala, V. t. Brush off. 
 
 Pamha, v. i. To have diar- 
 rhoea. 
 
 Panla, v. t. To form by cut- 
 ting. 
 
 Panda, v. i. Ascend, climb, 
 rise (as tide). 
 
 Pandiza, v. t. Caus. oi panda. 
 
 Pandia, v. i. To ascend a 
 river. 
 
 Panganla, v. t. Promise, 
 pledge (friendship). 
 
 Panga, v. t. Make, create. 
 
 Panginla, v. t. Govern, rule. 
 
 Panla, v. t. Hew, dig out (a 
 canoe) ; sharpen (a pole). 
 
 Para, v. t. Embrace (as 
 friends by hugging). 
 
 Para, a. Crowded full ; lum- 
 bered up. 
 
 Parapara. Things in con- 
 fusion. 
 
 Para, v. t. To hang on the 
 arm or shoulder. 
 
 Paranla, v. i. To be full ; 
 
 crowded ; recip. conj. of 
 
 para. 
 Paria, v. t. To carry in the 
 
 arms. 
 Parunla, v. t. Disentangle 
 
 (as a net that is fast). 
 Pixsa. To scratch. 
 Patalcapataha^ a. Hough 
 
 (Luke iii. 5). 
 Pava, v. t. Disobey, rebel, 
 
 forsake, 
 Pava, V. t. To dig up (as 
 
 plantain sets). 
 Pazanganla, v, t. Scatter, 
 
 waste. 
 Pazya, v. t. Search (by turn- 
 ing over things). 
 Paga, v. t. Prophesy, conjure. 
 Pdgwa, V. i. To be, or be- 
 come soft, ripe (a boil), 
 
 also banana. 
 PdMsd, V. i. Go, or pass 
 
 through. 
 Paid, ad. Well. 
 Pdma, V. i. Be fat. 
 Pdfniza, v., caus. of pdma. 
 
 Fatten. 
 Pdndia, v. t. Feign. 
 Pdnla, V. t. Be, or become 
 
 cool.. 
 Pdnliza, and Pdnlia, caus. 
 
 conj, (A pdnla. 
 Pdpdlia, V. t. 
 Pegaga, v. i. Be. 
 Pehwavehwanla, v. i. To 
 
 pass by one another ; going 
 
 opposite ways. 
 Pels, ad. Soon, immediately. 
 Penda, v. i. Be, or become 
 
 great ; grow. 
 Pendia and Pendiza, v. t., 
 
 caus. conj, o^ penda. 
 Pengahanla, v, t. Exchange, 
 
 swap. 
 
46 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Penga, 1. A sister, or near 
 relative ^iven in exchange 
 for a wife. 
 
 Peng'esonge. To fast. 
 
 P&nginla, v. t. Wait for. 
 
 Ponga, v. t. Commit adul- 
 tery or fornication by a man 
 on a woman ; pass, voice for 
 a woman. 
 
 Pe^ijavenja, v. t. Keep. 
 
 Pepia^ V. t. Beckon to (by 
 weaving the hand). 
 
 Pepa, V. t. Fan ; use a fan. 
 
 Pera^ v. i. Escape ; run away ; 
 be lost. 
 
 Periza, v. i. Cause to escape ; 
 run aw^ay. 
 
 Pera, v. i. {anlingd). Get, or 
 bring water from the spring. 
 
 Peria^ v. t. Give place; stand 
 aside ; to make ; let ; help 
 one to pass. 
 
 Perisa, v. t. Lose. 
 
 Pesya, v. t. Weigh. 
 
 Pesyanla. To contend with. 
 
 Pevinla, v. i. Blow (as wind). 
 
 Pezya, v. t. Burn ; caus. conj. 
 oi_pia. 
 
 Pe, ad. Still, now, yet. 
 
 Pedia, v. t. Insult, disregard. 
 
 Pekepche^ ad. Continuously ; 
 all the time. 
 
 Pela, V. t. Hunt fish wuth 
 harpoon (Manga, etc.) 
 
 Pelavela, v. t. Brandish. 
 
 Pehavel'a, v. t. Flap (as a 
 bird in flying). 
 
 Penla, v. i. Be slighted ; 
 omitted in distribution of 
 favors; be absent. Kadie 
 avenli esango ; hadie avenli 
 evilo jao ; ndinga epenV 
 ezango jao. 
 
 Penliza, v. t. Caus. of penla 
 
 avenliz' oijwanli'ain ezango 
 ga nta venli ngoa mengo. 
 
 Peni, 1. Span. 
 
 Penlia., v. t. Accompany. 
 
 Pengunla^ v. t. Castrate. 
 
 Penjinla, v. t., e. g. fanga. 
 Fear and fly from. 
 
 Penla, v. t. Twist. 
 
 Pera, v. t. Imitate by instinct, 
 or example. 
 
 Peva, V. i. Stagger. 
 
 Peva, V. i. Float, drift with 
 the current. 
 
 Peya, v. t. Lift ; push up. 
 
 Pla, V. i. Burn. 
 
 Piaganla, v. i. Pass by ; ex- 
 cel. 
 
 Piangxinliib, v. i. Chew, masti- 
 cate. 
 
 Piara, v. t. Squeeze (with 
 the hand, milk a cow). 
 
 Piere, ad. Near. 
 
 Pie, ad. Close by. 
 
 Piga, V. t. Keep. 
 
 Piginla, v. t., rel. conj. Kee^ 
 for. 
 
 Pika, V. t. Boast, bake, heat 
 (an iron). 
 
 Pikilia, V. t. Think. 
 
 Pila, V. i. Be, or come from. 
 
 Pinda, 1. Black or dark cloth 
 used for mourning. 
 
 Pinda, V, i. Lower (as sky). 
 
 Pindia, v. t. Push, shove. 
 
 Plndinla. To push along. 
 
 Pinga, v. t. Roll up into a 
 roll or ball ; wind around. 
 
 Pingwa, v. i. Go round. 
 
 Pingioavingwa, v. i. Sur- 
 round. 
 
 Pinja, V. t. Choose, prefer. 
 
 Pinja. To push. (Seepindia). 
 
 Pinla, V. t. Deliver ; take 
 to ; rel. conj. oi pa. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 4Y 
 
 Pita, V. t. Squeeze, cheat. 
 PitaJcanla, v. t. Press against, 
 
 upon, down. 
 Piva, V. t. Suck. 
 Pivia, V. t. Think, consider. 
 Piza, V. t. Wring, turn, bore 
 
 (with anger). • 
 
 Pisanla, v. t. Wind, entwine. 
 Pisa. To speak a hinguage. 
 Poa, V. i. Ebb ; dry up (as a 
 
 spring). 
 
 Podunla, v. t. Break open 
 (a house). 
 
 Poelela, v. i. Slip, slide. 
 
 Poganlio., v. t. Listen. 
 
 Poginla, v. t. Pity ; have 
 mercy. 
 
 Poka, v. i. AVade. 
 
 Poli^wa, V. i. Be dull, blunt, 
 notched. 
 
 Polo, ad. Much, very, greatly. 
 
 Poma. Peel bark. 
 
 Po)na, V. i. Grow. 
 
 Pofniza, V. t., (vaus. oi poma. 
 
 Porno inV ihahu). To stum- 
 ble ; hurt by stumbling. 
 
 Poinba, V. i. Wander a 
 fugitive. 
 
 Pomhiavomhia, v. i. Oscillate. 
 
 Ponine. Unoccupied place. 
 
 Pona, V. i. See, behold. 
 
 Pondua., v. i. To wax worse. 
 
 Ponia, V. t. Point at ; aim 
 at. 
 
 Ponja^ V. t. Miss (in shooting). 
 
 Poria, V. t. Sharpen (by 
 whetting or grinding). 
 
 Pongwe, 1. Wisdom, preco- 
 city. (See Mjjongwe). 
 
 Poro, ad. (see Ted). Follows 
 vonde as correl. Much, 
 more. 
 
 Posyo, ad. More. 
 
 Poswa, V. i. Fall. 
 
 Posyunlia, v. t., caus. To 
 fall ; to fall upon. 
 
 Posyanlio, v. p. To be fallen 
 upon by. 
 
 Pova, V. i. Flow (as a liquid). 
 
 Powl', 1. Back door. 
 
 Powe, 3 and 5. 
 
 Poza, V. i. Stop ; leave pur- 
 suit ; endure ; be patient ; 
 e. g., devanla, to forget ; stop 
 doing a customary thing ; 
 e. g., loving, giving ; poz' 
 omosya, pass awiiy time. 
 
 Puga, V. t. Cover. 
 
 Pugiza, v. t. Silence, inter- 
 rupt, extenuate. 
 
 Pugu, ad. In a pile outdoors ; 
 by me, at hand. 
 
 PiiJca, 1. Bag, sack, pocket. 
 
 Pulemango. To run. 
 
 Pule. ^ To fade. 
 
 Pundiga, v. To conceive ; 
 become pregnant. 
 
 Punda, V. i. To be launched ; 
 afloat. 
 
 Punga, v. t. Throw, cast (a 
 rock, a net). 
 
 Pundia, v. t. To launch. 
 
 Punga, v. t. To anchor (as 
 boat). 
 
 Pumbe. To run over (as yeast). 
 
 Pumhxiliu, V. t. Blow spittle 
 upon ; to bless ; oganga ep^ 
 oma igwarda, that he may 
 kill the sea-cow. 
 
 Punu, 1. Pawn. 
 
 Punjinla, v. t. Blow (with 
 mouth) ; bud. 
 
 Pura, V. t. Fold up (as clothes). 
 
 Pura, V. t. (with mondoy. 
 Lay a snare ; set a trap. 
 
 Purunla, v. t. Roll up to- 
 gether (into ball or roll) ; 
 stoop down. 
 
48 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Puranla-Tribe, y. i. To bend 
 
 down. 
 Purua, V. i. Be, or become 
 
 untied. 
 Parunla^ v. t. Untie, unloose. 
 Pusu, 1. Silk (of corn). 
 Pusi, 1, Cat. 
 Pupil, a. White. 
 Pusd. Accident. 
 Puvinla, v. i. To be jealous 
 
 of. 
 Piizwa. To burst open (as a 
 
 barrel). 
 
 R. 
 
 Ralie, a. Full. 
 
 Ret. Whole, entire. 
 
 Pdwonge. A kind of stars in 
 the heavens resembling a 
 lizard. 
 
 Pereuenle, 1. Master, owner. 
 
 Rekadie. A certain person ; 
 a person ; such a one. 
 
 Rere, 1. Father, master, pro- 
 tector ; vera / in voc. case. 
 
 Regd, a. Crooked, wrong. 
 
 Rekope, probably adv. phrase. 
 Avenli tnie so, rekope^ i. e., 
 he gave it, but soon de- 
 manded it back again. 
 
 RUi, ad. Rightly, truly. 
 
 Rue, a. Bent, crooked. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sa. A terra to frighten or 
 drive away, or out, any ani- 
 mal. 
 
 Saga, v. t. To rub oil on 
 one's self. 
 
 Bagia, v. t. To rub oil on an- 
 other person. 
 
 Salinla, v. t. Combing (i. e., 
 JEsalinla, comb). 
 
 Salia, V. i. Be detected; 
 
 found out. 
 Sanli. What? how? why? 
 
 olingo sanll, how long a 
 
 time ? 
 Sanibo, conj. Therefore, so. 
 Scmgasanga, a. Tliin, sleazy. 
 Sangunla, v. t. Salute, em- 
 brace. (See syangunla). 
 Sambakanla, v. i. Be restless ; 
 
 sleepless ; roll ; toss to and - 
 
 fro. 
 Samha, v. t. To spread (as 
 
 setting a table). 
 Sapitnina, 1. Bolt. 
 Sapilia, v. t. Confuse, per- 
 plex. 
 Sasunla, v. t. Unravel ; take 
 
 to pieces. 
 Sava, V. t. Curse. 
 Sad la, V. Owenja wl savia. 
 
 It lightens. 
 Savinla, v. t. Reverence, 
 
 worship, bless. 
 Sawunla, v. Prey ; raven. 
 Sazunla, v. t. Tear in pieces ; 
 
 devour greedily (tiger, a 
 
 goat). 
 Sazya, v. t. Take or tear 
 
 down (a house); efface a 
 
 writing. 
 Saga, v. i. Do wrong; go 
 
 crooked. 
 Sdgiza, v. t. Befool. 
 Sdgunla, v. t. Trim, ojo, etc. 
 Sdldwdld. Silver. 
 Sdlinla, v. i. To persevere 
 
 in. • 
 
 Sdrriba, v. t. Kiss. 
 Sdmhanla v. t, ; recip. con. of 
 
 sdmha. Kiss each other. 
 Sdlna. To string beads, or 
 
 anything. 
 Sdnga, v. t. Mend, repair. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONAET, 
 
 49 
 
 Saga, v. t. {ihonli). To cut 
 or hew firewood. 
 
 Sdta, V. t Creep up to slyly ; 
 surprise. 
 
 /Sdva, V. t. Smite, cut, 
 
 Sdva, V. i. Be sorry. 
 
 Sdzye^ 1. Soldier. 
 
 Sdzya, v. t. Seduce ; lead to 
 sin. 
 
 Sdzya, v. t. Complain ; talk 
 a palaver. 
 
 Sdzyinla, v. t. To complain to. 
 
 Sizisya, V. t. Sue (at law) ; 
 talk a palaver. 
 
 Sega, v. t. Mock. 
 
 Senja, v. t. Disown an agent's 
 act. 
 
 Sezya, v. i. Lay the head 
 down. 
 
 Se, ad. How, why. 
 
 Se, int. pron. What. 
 
 Sei, ad. Out, protruding. 
 
 Sehe, 1 {isehe). Dirt. 
 
 f Prompt to 
 
 Sekelia, v. t. J evil, or con- 
 
 Sekedia, v. t. j tinuance in 
 [ evil. 
 
 SekuMa, v. i. Sob, sigh. 
 
 Sela, V. t. (with isdngd). To 
 be in travail. 
 
 SeUla, V. i. Slip. 
 
 Sella. Laugh at. 
 
 Semha, v. t. Scold, blame. 
 
 Sema, v. t.- To agree to. 
 
 Senlia, v. i. Start (on a jour- 
 ney). 
 
 Sevia, V. t. e. g., nlungunla, 
 to help; e. g.^javuria, toss 
 up and down ; e. g., rice in 
 a fan. 
 
 Syagia, v. t. Anoint, smear. 
 
 Syaioga^ v. t. Peel. 
 
 Syacuga, v. t. Wrap (a gar- 
 ment round one's self). 
 
 Syaiya, v. t. {say a). Be dis- 
 appointed ; ashamed. 
 
 Syazya, or Sazya, v. t. De- 
 molish, tear down (a house) ; 
 efiaee. 
 
 Syardncla, v. i. Love one's 
 self ; ref. conj. of tdnda. 
 
 Syavanlia, v. i. Hang one's 
 self ; ex. hanlia, ref. conj. 
 
 Syape, 1. Key, mostly used 
 in pi., even when one is 
 meant. 
 
 Syambua, v. i. Open (as a 
 flower) ; bloom. 
 
 Syarnba, v. t. Set, arrange (a 
 table) ; spread out ; to hang 
 up a thing. 
 
 Syanibunlia ilambunla). To 
 spread out Hat. 
 
 Syayuwa, v. i. Commit sui- 
 cide. 
 
 Syawa, v. i. Flash (as light- 
 ning). 
 
 Syanga, v. t. {pmangatungd). 
 To peel cocoa-nut. 
 
 Sydva, V. {sdva). Be sony. 
 
 Sydvunla, v. i. Bathe one's 
 self ; rel. conj. ex. joUunla. 
 
 Sydzya, or Sdzya. Complain ; 
 talk a palaver. 
 
 Sydzya, v. t. To gather bam- 
 boo leaves. 
 
 SydkdUa, v. t. Interrupt, an- 
 noy. 
 
 Sydmhunla, v. t. Hide one's 
 self; I'ef. conj. ex.jamhunla, 
 
 8yd oa, v. t. Peck. 
 
 Sydva, v. i. Escape from. 
 
 Sydria^ v. t. Allure, entice, 
 tempt. 
 
 Sydnganla, v. i. Be cured ; 
 made whole ; get well. 
 
 Syekidia, v. t. Indulge, en- 
 courage. 
 
50 
 
 .MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Syeva, v. t. {seva). Plaj. 
 Syenga^ v. t. Clear out (a 
 
 road') ; remove obstructions. 
 8yeng%nla^ v. t. Shave. 
 Sy('ga, v. t. Mimic, 
 SyHia, V, t. Laugh at ; deride. 
 jSycsya, v. i. To lay down the 
 
 head. 
 /Syika, V. t. To catch by neck ; 
 
 to choke. 
 Syiha, 1. Silver (generally 
 
 with ya-pupu and sing.) 
 8yiha-ya-tetda teula . G old . 
 Syllia, V. t. Gaze at ; examine. 
 /Syinga, v. i. To roar. 
 Syhiya, v. t. Stamp (with 
 
 foot). 
 Sylza^ V. t. Be bold. 
 Sylsylla, v. n. Disobedience. 
 Syiiva, V. Cut (bush). 
 jSyira, v. t. Whip (with a 
 
 stick). 
 Syiminla, v, i. To groan. 
 Syoka, V. t. Shake up ; spill. 
 /Syorasyoua,Sid. In abundance. 
 jSyuga, v. t. Shake, distm-b, 
 
 ti'ouble. 
 Syugasugaga, v. t. Shake. 
 jSyi'/mbu, 1. Lead (the mineral). 
 Syusya, v. i. Move or hitch 
 
 along (near to a person). 
 /Syuna, v. t. Reveal (a secret). 
 Syuria, v. t. Convict ; prove 
 
 guilty. 
 Siga, V. i. Run aground ; 
 
 ground (as a boat in shal- 
 lows). 
 /Sika, 1. Silver, money. 
 Sikimia, v. t. Ask, or inquire 
 
 out any matter. 
 Sila, a. V. Disobedient, and 
 
 to be disobedient. 
 Silina^ V. t. {silinla). Go, or 
 
 act contrary ; to disobey. 
 
 Simanla, v. i., e. g., JcweBonga- 
 nla. Agree together; fit 
 each other. 
 
 Siminla^ v. i. Groan. 
 
 Simha^ V. i. To land at a place ; 
 by the way, or journey. 
 
 Simhia, v. t. Preserve, up- 
 hold. 
 
 Shiga, V. t. Dye, color. 
 
 Sifida, a. {isinda). Cruel. 
 
 Sindinla, v. t. Endure, bear." 
 
 Sira, V. t. Be against ; in op- 
 position to. 
 
 Sini, 1. Chemise, petticoat. 
 
 Siva, V. i. Amount to ; arrive 
 at. 
 
 Siza, V. t. Rub, scour. 
 
 Sizinla, v. i. To scrape. 
 
 Sodunla, v. t. Bruise. 
 
 Soga, V. t. Mix (liquid) ; nV 
 ezanga, satu rated . 
 
 Soko, V. i. Spill. 
 
 SoJciza. Causing to spill. 
 
 Solia, V. t. Go under. 
 
 Soliza, V. t. Put, or place 
 under. 
 
 Somhia, v. t. Command. 
 
 Songa, v. t. Follow. 
 
 Syonlia, v, t. Lower. 
 
 Sopa, V. t. To clasp and hold 
 in the arms. 
 
 Sowa, V. t. Bruise. 
 
 Sua, V. t. {swa). To cut un- 
 derbrush, grass, etc. 
 
 Sua, V. t. To snatch (a thing). 
 
 Sula, V. i. Come to an end ; 
 end. 
 
 Suliza, V. t. End, finish, de- 
 stroy. 
 
 Sufha, V. t. Descend (a river) ; 
 to land. 
 
 Sufhinlia, V. t. Descend from 
 a height. 
 
 Suminlia, \ . t. Praise. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 51 
 
 Suna, V. t. SuTi^ ogd g' 
 orjwanja iv'oma, sun' ebd. 
 To make known privately ; 
 to complain to the king 
 about a person, 
 
 Sungakanlciy v. t. Contend 
 (by words, or otherwise). 
 
 Sunga, v. t. Lend money, etc., 
 to be restored in kind, 
 
 Sunge, ad. Soon, quickly, 
 
 Su7ige^ ad. In a little time, 
 
 Suna. Pinch, twinge. 
 
 Simdiasundia, v. 
 
 Suria, V, t. To know thor- 
 oughly. 
 
 Sunginla^ v. t. Save, 
 
 Syavuzya, v. t., qx. puga. To 
 cover one's self; wrap about. 
 
 Sunja, V. t. Tie (a bandage 
 tight). 
 
 /Syogwa, v, i. To boast, glory, 
 ex, syogwa nV igumha 
 ndakadie esogwa nV igumha. 
 
 Sogunlia^ v. t. Boast against ; 
 glory over. (Rom. xi. 18). 
 
 Syuga, v. t. To shake ; ex- 
 cite, trouble. 
 
 Syugazua, v. i. Shake, be- 
 trouble. 
 
 Swaka, 1. Knife. 
 
 Syusyunlia, v. t. Together 
 (as the skirt of dress). 
 
 Swaswd, ad. Opposite, above. 
 
 Syoru7ila, v. t. Take off (a 
 garment). 
 
 Syangwazyangwa, e. g. sunga- 
 hanla, i. e,, dispute about a 
 thing. 
 
 Swena^ v. t. Snatch. 
 
 Syamba^ v. t. To hang up, 
 e. g., a curtain, 
 
 Syangunla, v. t. To embrace. 
 
 Syawunla, v. i. Shine bright- 
 ly- 
 
 Syozua, V. i. Dissolve (soap 
 in water). 
 
 T. 
 
 Tavi. Play the game ntyange. 
 
 Ta, V. t. iinhanlo). lielate 
 legends. 
 
 Ta, V. t. Sting, hurt. 
 
 Taga, v. t. Choke (as weeds 
 corn). 
 
 Taganla. To become en- 
 tangled. 
 
 Tahilia, v. t. Tell, inform. 
 
 Taho, 1, Tobacco. 
 
 Tala, V. t. Make clay floor. 
 
 Talua, V. t. Quit, leave (farm). 
 
 Talia, v. t. Put, lay upon, 
 
 Tamla, v. t. Hunt clams and 
 fish left in holes by the tide. 
 
 Tanga, v. t. Swear ; make 
 oath. 
 
 Tanga, v. t. Count, think. 
 
 Tandua, v. i. Rip (as sewing). 
 
 Tandunla, v. t. 
 
 Tanda, v. i. Dodge about 
 (when pursued). 
 
 Tanda. To be tame, not 
 easily frightened. 
 
 Tangunla, v. t. Read. 
 
 Tanla. v. ) rn i 
 
 Tanlia. .( ^^ ^^ ^^^"•>^- 
 
 Tara, v. To keep ; withhold. 
 
 Tata, 1. Father, a term of 
 respect. 
 
 Tataminla, v. i. Tremble. 
 
 Tava, V. t. Cut to pieces ; 
 rip apart ; draw out. 
 
 Twa, V. i. Alter, change. 
 
 Tavinla, v. t. Pay a tine ; ex- 
 piate a crime. 
 
 Tavoro, 1. A table. 
 
 Tada, v, i. Part (as a rope) ; 
 break in two. 
 
52 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Tavunla^ v. t. Take off or 
 away a vessel from the fire. 
 
 Td, aiix. V. Used with pot. 
 imp. Could, would. 
 
 Ta, 2i<\vevh verb. Rather. 
 
 Tata, def. v. or int. Oh that ! 
 
 Tata, a. He is better (in sick- 
 ness only). 
 
 Tdmia, v. t. Prefer, choose. 
 
 Tdmd, V. t. Own, to adopt. 
 
 Tdma, V. t. Espouse. 
 
 Tdva, V. t. Insult (with words). 
 
 Tengnnla, v. t. Cause to 
 kneel, distort, careen. 
 
 Tegwa, v. i. Tip down (as 
 boat) ; err ; go wrong, kneel, 
 or careen. 
 
 Tela, V. t. Spy out. 
 
 Telanganla, v. i. and a. 
 Across ; go across. 
 
 Tennsa, v, t. Deceive, befool. 
 
 Tenlatenla, a. Red, yellow, 
 brown. 
 
 Tenia, v. t. Cut with any 
 sharp iustrument. 
 
 Tenia, v. i. Sit up at night. 
 
 Tenliza, v. t. Settle, decide 
 (a dispute). 
 
 Tendia, v. t. Avoid ; turn 
 away. 
 
 Ten da, v. t. Write, engrave, 
 inscribe. 
 
 Tendinla, v. i. Cause to write 
 to any one. 
 
 Teria, v. t. Frighten. 
 
 Teva, V. t. Show. 
 
 Tevunla, v. t. Reprove, in- 
 struct, correct (with words). 
 
 TegejTia, v. t. Covet. 
 
 Telarela, v. To go frequently 
 between places. 
 
 Tele, a. Kaked. 
 
 Tengunla, v. i. Limp. 
 
 Teta, V. t. Say, speak. 
 
 Tetevenld, ad. [gotetevenla) . 
 Just now. 
 
 Tevenld, ad. {gotevenld). Just 
 now ; just. 
 
 Teva, V, t. Hatch, crack. 
 
 Tevia, V. i. Be, or become 
 wet. 
 
 Tl've, a. Wet. 
 
 Teoiza, V. t. Wet. 
 
 Tia, V. i. Fear. 
 
 Tiaganla, rel. couj. To fear 
 each other. 
 
 Tiena, v. t. Distrust. 
 
 Tieza, v. t. Frighten. 
 
 Tiga, v. t. Stop, cease, leave. 
 
 Tiganla. v. i. Be left ; stay 
 behind. 
 
 Timhiarimbia, v. i. Stagger. 
 
 Tim, V. i. To be permeated 
 with (bread with leaven). 
 
 Toa, V. i. Go, be, become. 
 
 Toanla, v. t. Carry. 
 
 Toanliza, v. t. Send (by an- 
 other) ; cause one to carry ; 
 to load a person. 
 
 Toazango, ad., e. g., vendetua. 
 Perhaps ; if perhaps. 
 
 Todunla, v. t. Pull up ; not 
 np ; eradicate. 
 
 Togora, v. t. Perspire. 
 
 Toka, V. t., e. g. tumba. Dig. 
 
 Tokxmla, v. t. Dig ; gouge ; 
 pluck out (as things). 
 
 Tola,y.\. Be well ; get well; 
 be in comfortable circum- 
 stances. 
 
 Toliza, V. t. Cure (from dan- 
 ger) ; rescue ; bestow favors. 
 
 T^a, V. t. Break through (a 
 fence). 
 
 Toliza, V. t. Make a hole 
 through. 
 
 Tolongo, 1. Trunk. 
 
 Tolu, 1. Towel. 
 
MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Toma^ V, t. Send. 
 Tofhinlia, v. t. Order; send 
 
 for (a thing). 
 Tomha, v. t. Take away ; 
 
 throw away ; subtract. 
 Tomhare jpa. Except, besides. 
 Tomhinla, v. t. Take up 
 
 away (stretch out or up the 
 
 the arm). 
 Tonga, v. t. Speak loud ; 
 
 hallo, yell, bellow. 
 Tongwa, v. i. Kise (from the 
 
 dead). 
 Tongunlia, v. t. . Raise (from 
 
 the dead). 
 Tora^ V. t. ftemove (one's 
 
 effects or town) from a place. 
 Tova, V. t. Yomit, 
 Tova, V. i. Be, or becoiyie 
 
 mouldy. 
 Tonda, or tdnda, v. t. Love. 
 Tondanla, ov tdndanla, v. i. 
 
 Love each other. 
 Tondia, or tdndia, v. ' t. 
 
 Flease, delight. 
 Tondlza, or tdyidiza, v. t. 
 
 Cause to love. 
 Tonginla, or tdnginla, v. t. 
 
 Lust after; desire (in bad 
 
 sense). 
 Tongiva, or tbngwa, v. i. Eise 
 
 (as sun). 
 Tua, a. Sharp. 
 Tuenlia,y.t. Spit; spit upon. 
 Tuenla. ' Be ; become ; be 
 
 fultilled. 
 Txiga, V. t. Turn (one's self) ; 
 
 tuge nyuma. 
 Tuga, V. t. Abuse, oppress ; 
 
 tug'' osyaka. 
 Tugwa, v. i. Be blown down ; 
 
 fall (as a house). 
 Tukia, V. t. Bruise. 
 TuTcway V. i. Be bruised. 
 
 Tida, V. i. To kick about, as 
 
 tortus in utero. 
 Tula, V. t. Pulveiize ; pound 
 
 (with pestle). 
 Tid'' agovi. To slap the hands 
 
 together in astonishment. 
 Tula, V. i. Be, or become dull. 
 Tuma, V. t. Piei'ce, spear, 
 
 sew. 
 Tumba, v. t. Dig (in the 
 
 ground). 
 Tumhakanla, v. 
 Tuminlia, v. t. Point out ; 
 
 show ; aim. 
 Tumunla, v. t. To dig a 
 
 sluice. 
 Tunla, Y. t. To do black- 
 smithing. 
 Tunla, V. i. {tuna). Be, or 
 
 become short. 
 Tunlisa, or ticnlia, v. t. 
 
 Shorten. 
 Turinlia, v. i. To shrink (as 
 
 cloth). 
 Tute, 1. Two fathoms (four 
 
 yards cloth). 
 Tuta, V. t. Present, give. 
 Tuwa, V. t. Burst. 
 Tuioa, V. t. To accuse f^dsely ; 
 
 slander. 
 Tuwunla, v. i. Spring up ; 
 
 grow .(as planted seeds). 
 Tuezinla, v. t. Drip. 
 Tyunazunaga, v. t. {ntyun- 
 
 azanaga). Deal out spar- 
 ingly. 
 
 V. 
 
 vanganle, conj. Through ; 
 even yet. 
 
 Vange, ad. After that. 
 
 vanij ad. {venli). Where? 
 
 vd, prep. At ; in ; for ; on ac- 
 count of. 
 
54 
 
 MPONGWE DICTIONARY. 
 
 vdUvenld, ad. Jnst now. 
 
 vdvd, ad. There. 
 
 vdte, ad, Jnst now ; go-te and 
 
 yotHevenld. 
 'vdvdme, ad. At that time. 
 vengevenge. Smiling, pleased. 
 venli, a. Where (prigi so 
 
 venli f) 
 venld, ad. Here, now. 
 veiide, ad. Lest. 
 vendetua, ad. Perhaps. 
 verevere, a. Low. 
 vevele, a. Smooth, level. 
 ■vi, ad. Entirely out (of fire, 
 
 light, etc.) 
 via. Finished, done (with nli). 
 viaganlo, ad. More. 
 vidvid, a. Black. 
 vinte., 1. A cent. 
 vingovingo, ad. Around. 
 volovolo, ad. All round. 
 
 vonde^ con. 
 vondo, con. " 
 
 If only as preceding 
 correllating kupondo. 
 e. g. vondo ezazinld 
 kd poro mezA, if this 
 thing much more 
 than tliat. 
 
 w. 
 
 Wami^ 1. ; pi. awmila. Mj 
 children. 
 
 Wdnld., a. Oma. 
 Wenli. On lome. 
 WolanganlanyamMe, ad. In- 
 discriminately. 
 
 Yantyd^ ]. Small quantity. 
 Yawa7ila, 1« Little (boys or 
 
 girls). 
 Ydnld, dem. pron. That 
 
 (mostly prefixed by mi?). 
 Yakd, ad. Continually. 
 Yeydifia. Some (pi. of 
 
 oijwdzdma). 
 Ye?ild, ad. So, thus. 
 T^, int. pron. Which (of a 
 
 number). 
 Yinld, dem. pron. Thus. 
 
 Zange, a. Open (as a door). 
 Zima, a. Grave, serious ; (op- 
 posite to orogd). 
 Zoli, prep. Under. 
 Zoioa, a. Strait, narrow. 
 Zoge, a. Squatted down. 
 Zuere, ad. Used with nhei. 
 Zyele^ du. Is not at all. 
 Zyele., v. def . Is not. 
 
4^ 
 
 ^ U-r^' /^ 
 
 ^-i^^-C-^y 
 
 u 
 
 'l^iyu- ^i 
 
 <^-- 
 


 a 
 
 
 fH>6 
 
 
 o 
 
,c 
 
 A' y^i^ y'l^ / f - / /L I / 7 
 
 
 I'C'ydLr, ~ 
 
 /J ■ /^_ - ^l ^A^x — » 
 
 (£> 
 
 
 I 
 
 r 
 
oc. 
 
 rh-^^Z 
 
 4^ . 
 
( 
 
■*i .. .Lv 
 
 /